110
Siemens LV 1 · 2009 15 15/2 Introduction 3WL Air Circuit Breakers 3WL Air Circuit Breakers/ Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC) 15/6 General data 15/7 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions 15/11 3-pole, withdrawable versions 15/15 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions 15/19 4-pole, withdrawable versions 15/23 Options 15/29 Accessories and spare parts 3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC) 15/50 3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions 15/51 3-pole, withdrawable versions 15/52 4-pole, withdrawable versions 15/53 Accessories and spare parts SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices – Air Circuit Breakers © Siemens AG 2009

3WL Siemens

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1515/2 Introduction

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

15/6 General data15/7 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/11 3-pole, withdrawable versions15/15 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/19 4-pole, withdrawable versions15/23 Options15/29 Accessories and spare parts

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

15/50 3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions15/51 3-pole, withdrawable versions15/52 4-pole, withdrawable versions15/53 Accessories and spare parts

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices – Air Circuit Breakers

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/2 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

■ Overview

✓ Standard-- Not available❑ Optional1) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.

Air circuit breakers 3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC) 3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Size I, II, III II

Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300

1000, 2000, 4000

Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole

Rated operational voltage Ue

V ACV DC

... 690/1000/1150--

--... 1000

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 500 V AC

kA

Size I

55/66

Size II

66/80/100

Size III

100/150 (3-pole), 130 (4-pole)

30/25/20 (at 300/600/1000 V DC)

Endurance Operating cycles

20000 15000 10000 15000

Mounting position

Degree of protectionWith cover IP55 IP55Without cover (with door sealing frame)

IP41 IP41

Dimensions 3-/4-pole

W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590

H mm 434 434 434 434D mm

H mmD mm

291

465.5471

291

465.5471

291

465.5471

291

465.5471

Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76BElectronic releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakersOverload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Short-time delayed short-circuit protection

-- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Instantaneous short-circuit protection

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓

Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑

Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑

LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --

LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓

Communication through PROFIBUS DP

-- -- -- ❑ ❑

Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑

Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓

Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓

CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓

Size IIISize IISize I

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

NSS0_00535

H

W D

NS

E0_

0110

6a

NS

E0_

0110

7a

NS

E0_

0110

8a

NS

E0_

0110

9a Rating Plug

NS

E0_

0111

1a

Fixed mounting

Withdraw-able

© Siemens AG 2009

15

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/3Siemens LV 1 · 2009

Switching capacity

1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be

greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.

Size I II III

Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13

Switching capacity class N S N S H H C3-pole

C4-pole

Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC

Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC

Icu kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)

Ics kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 704) 704)

Icm kA -- -- -- -- 150 105 1544) 1544)

Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)

0.5 s kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100

2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80

3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100

N S N S H H C C

Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)

Non-automatic air circuit breakers with DC switching capacity

These circuit breakers are indicated in the selection and ordering data by orange backgrounds.

N

S

H

C

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/4 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

SENTRON 3WL: Superior individual products integrated into uniform power distribution systems - up to and including industry-specific industrial and infrastructure solutions

$ Guide frame (pages 15/30 to 15/33)

% Main circuit connection front, flange, horizontal, vertical (pages 15/45 and 15/46)

& Position indicator switch (pages 15/26 and 15/38)

( Grounding contact, leading (page 15/42)

) Shutter (page 15/41)

* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module (page 15/44)

+ External CubicleBUS module (page 15/43)

, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release (page 15/40)

- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system (page 15/39)

. Auxiliary switch block (page 15/40)

/ Door sealing frame (page 15/41)

0 Interlocking set for base plate (page 15/36)

1 Transparent panel, function insert (page 15/35)

2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated (page 15/38)

3 Motorized operating mechanism (page 15/40)

4 Operating cycles counter (page 15/38)

5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) (page 15/44)

6 Protective device with device holder, electronic release (ETU) (page 15/34)

7 Remote reset solenoid (page 15/35)

8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) (page 15/43)

9 Four-line display (page 15/34)

: Ground-fault protection module (page 15/34)

; Rated current module (page 15/34)

< Measuring function module (page 15/34)

= Circuit breaker (pages 15/7 to 15/22)

18

17

1620

15

21

23

22

24

14

19

6

45

7

8

9

2

25

10

11

12

13

3

1

NS

E0_

0188

7a

© Siemens AG 2009

15

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/5Siemens LV 1 · 2009

Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)

Features• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP

or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL

• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories allows easy retrofitting of all communication components

• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the possibility of linking up external input and output modules to the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL

• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation, monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers, both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/Intranet/Internet

• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation solutions

Communication: • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function

(ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release) see pages 15/7 to 15/22.

• For accessories see pages 15/43 and 15/44. • For more information see also the chapter "Power Manage-

ment System" and "Software for Power Distribution".

5

1

21

22

19

8 6

2

4

20

14 15 16 17 18 7

91

3

10

11

12

13

SENTRON 3VLElectronic LCD ETU releaseElectronic ETU releaseCOM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSICOM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSIBreaker Data Adapter (BDA)BDA Plus with Ethernet interfaceBrowser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)SENTRON 3WLCOM15 PROFIBUS module1)

Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)

1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.2) For a MODBUS connection the COM21 module is required.

1234567891011

Electronic ETU releaseMeasurement function PlusZSI moduleDigital output module with relay contactsDigital output module with relay contacts, configurableAnalog output moduleDigital input moduleSwitch ES Power on PCPLC e.g. SIMATIC S7SIMATIC powercontrolPAC

1213141516171819202122

NS

E0_

0110

5h

PROFIBUS

Ethernet

CubicleBUS

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/6 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

■ Benefits

Low space requirements

The SENTRON 3WL devices require very little space. Size I de-vices (up to 1600 A) fit into a 400 mm wide switchgear panel. Size III devices (up to 6300 A) are the smallest of their kind and with their construction width of 704 mm fit into a 800 mm wide switchgear panel.

Modular design

Components like auxiliary releases, motorized operating mechanisms, electronic releases, current sensors, auxiliary cir-cuit signaling switches, automatic reset devices, interlocks and engagement operating mechanisms can all be exchanged or retrofitted at a later stage, thus allowing the circuit breaker to be adapted to new, changing requirements.

The main contact elements can all be replaced in order to in-crease the endurance of the circuit breaker.

Retrofittable modules for electronic releases

Modularity is one of the main features of the new SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers. Special LCDs, ground-fault modules, rated current modules and communication modules for the electronic releases are available for fast and easy retrofitting and adaptation to changing requirements.

Communication

The use of modern communication-capable circuit breakers opens up completely new possibilities in terms of start-up, parameterization, diagnostics, maintenance and operation. This allows many different ways of reducing costs and improving pro-ductivity in industrial plants, buildings and infrastructure projects to be achieved.

• Fast and reliable parameterization• Timely information and response can prevent plant

stoppages• Effective diagnostics management• Measured values are the basis for efficient load management,

for drawing up power demand profiles and for assigning en-ergy to cost centers

• Preventive maintenance reduces the risk of expansive plant down-times

■ Application • As incoming-feeder, distribution, tie, and outgoing-feeder cir-

cuit breakers in electrical installations• For switching and protecting motors, capacitors, generators,

transformers, busbars and cables

Due to the reinforced use of electronic I&C systems, the de-mands made on air circuit breakers in terms of operator control and monitoring of network processes have increased.

The extensive, coordinated SENTRON range of devices covers all applications between 16 A and 6300 A with compact and air circuit breakers.

The AC devices are available as circuit breakers and non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. DC devices are only available as non-automatic air circuit breakers.

Standards

SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:• IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1• IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2• Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30.

Versions with UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.

For further standards, see Appendix.

Conductor cross-sections

1) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.

2) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit breakers: 4 × 120 × 10 mm.

Size I IIType Up to

3WL11 103WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20

Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections

• Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1)

• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)1)

AAA

100010001000

125012501210

160016001490

800800800

100010001000

125012501250

160016001600

200020002000

Main conductor minimum cross-sections

• Copper bars, bare

• Copper bars, painted black

Unit(s)mm2

Unit(s)mm2

1 × 60 × 10

1 × 60 × 10

2 × 40 × 10

2 × 40 × 10

2 × 50 × 10

2 × 50 × 10

1 × 50 × 10

1 × 50 × 10

1 × 60 × 10

1 × 60 × 10

2 × 40 × 10

2 × 40 × 10

2 × 50 × 10

2 × 50 × 10

3 × 50 × 10

3 × 50 × 10

Size II III

Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63

Permissible load • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)1)

• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)1)

AAA

250025002280

320030202870

395038103600

400040004000

500050005000

592058105500

Main conductor minimum cross-sections

• Copper bars, bare

• Copper bars, painted black

Unit(s)mm2

Unit(s)mm2

2 × 100 × 10

2 × 100 × 10

3 × 100 × 10

3 × 100 × 10

4 × 120 × 10

4 × 100 × 102)

4 x 100 x 10

4 × 100 × 10

6 x 100 x 10

6 × 100 × 10

6 x 120 x 10

6 × 120 × 10

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/7Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

For footnotes see page 15/10.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000

Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

N

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/8 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/10.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kg

Horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000

Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

S

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/9Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/10.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000

Vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000

Front main circuit connection, single holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

H

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/10 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Footnotes for pages 15/7 to 15/10:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-

dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.

2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".

3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

5) ETU45B and ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.

6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 150 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000

Vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

C

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, withdrawable versions

15/11Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

For footnotes see page 15/14.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

N

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, withdrawable versions

15/12 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/14.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kg

Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000

With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000

With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

S

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, withdrawable versions

15/13Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/14.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000

With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000

With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000

With guide frames, connecting flangesII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

H

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3-pole, withdrawable versions

15/14 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Footnotes for pages 15/11 to 15/14:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-

dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.

2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".

3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.

6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 150 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000

With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000

With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000

Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional price

Without electronic release AA Without

Electronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NG

Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

C

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/15Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

For footnotes see page 15/18.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

N

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/16 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/18.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kg

Horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000

Vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000

Front main circuit connection, single holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

S

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/17Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/18.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000Front main circuit connection, single holeII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

H

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/18 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Footnotes for pages 15/15 to 15/18:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-

dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.

2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".

3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.

4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.

6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 130 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgHorizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000

Vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

C

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, withdrawable versions

15/19Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

For footnotes see page 15/22.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,ECO switching capacity N

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

N

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, withdrawable versions

15/20 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/22.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 66/80 kA at 500 V, standard switching capacity S

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kg

Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000With guide frames, connecting flangesI 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000

II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NBVersions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

S

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, withdrawable versions

15/21Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For footnotes see page 15/22.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 100 kA at 500 V, high switching capacity H

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000With guide frames, connecting flangesII 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000

III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price

Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU15B: Protection functions LI6) BBETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

H

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

4-pole, withdrawable versions

15/22 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Footnotes for pages 15/19 to 15/22:1) The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-

dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current. If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on page 15/24.

2) For permissible rated short-time current Icc and rated short-circuit making capacity Icm for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".

3) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding the supplement "–Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.

4) Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.

5) ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm and tripping), see page 15/34.

6) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Rated current1) In

Icu up to 130 kA at 500 V, very high switching capacity C

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Basic price per PU

A A kA DT kgWithout guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 115.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000

With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000

With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionIII 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Additional

price Without electronic release AA WithoutElectronic releasesVersions without ground-fault protectionETU25B: Protection functions LSI CBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) EBETU45B: Protection functions LSIN3) with 4-line display FBETU76B: Protection functions LSIN3) with pixel graphics display NB

Versions with ground-fault protectionETU27B: Protection functions LSING4) DGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) EGETU45B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with 4-line display FGETU76B: Protection functions LSING3)5) with pixel graphics display NGStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closingWithout 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without

C

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/23Siemens LV 1 · 2009

■ Selection and ordering data

Order No. supplement Additional price

3WL 1 . . . - . . . . . -7777

Operating mechanismsManual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1 Without

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period

Closing solenoid

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

110 110 ... 125 2230 220 3

Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period

Motor Closing solenoid

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

208 ... 240 220 ... 250 230 220 4110 ... 127 110 ... 125 110 110 ... 125 5-- 24 -- 24 6

To order different voltages for motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid or closing solenoid for synchronization purposes: "1" at the 13th digit of the Order No. and order codes, see page 15/25.

1st auxiliary release Without 1st auxiliary release A Without

Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC

-- 24 B-- 30 C-- 48 D-- 60 E110 110 ... 125 F230 220 G

2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release A Without

Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC

-- 24 B-- 30 C-- 48 D-- 60 E110 110 ... 125 F230 220 G

Undervoltage release, instantaneous (� 80 ms), short-delay (� 200 ms)Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC

-- 24 J-- 30 K-- 48 L-- 60 U110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M208 ... 240 220 ... 250 N380 ... 415 -- P

Undervoltage release, can be delayed between 0.2 s and 3.2 s Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x Us

Us AC 50/60 Hz V Us V DC

-- 48 Q110 ... 127 110 ... 125 R208 ... 240 220 ... 250 S380 ... 415 -- T

Auxiliary switches 1st auxiliary switch block2 NO + 2 NC 2 Without

1st + 2nd auxiliary switch block4 NO + 4 NC 46 NO + 2 NC 75 NO + 3 NC 8

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/24 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.

2) Not necessary for circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C as these circuit breakers can be used as standard up to 1150 V AC.

3) Front connections are tinned as standard. 4) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K

lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z

Additional price

and additional order code(s)@ @ @ + . . . + . . .

Code for "Further versions"–Z

Operating manualPrinted version

In scope of supply of circuit breaker) French/Italian A 1 1

In scope of supply of circuit breaker) Spanish/Portuguese A 1 2

Rated voltage 1000 V AC/DC Add. price 3-pole

Add. price 4-poleOnly for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H

(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4") Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1150 V AC order code "A15".

Size II1) Up to 2000 A A 0 52500 A A 0 53200 A A 0 5

Size III1)2) 4000 A A 0 55000 A A 0 56300 A A 0 5

Rated voltage 1150 V AC/DCOnly for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (8th digit of the Order No. is a "4") Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1000 V AC order code "A05".

Size II Up to 2000 A A 1 52500 A A 1 53200 A A 1 54000 A A 1 5

For size III select a circuit breaker with very high switching capacity C. Tin-plated version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)4)

Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.

Size I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8

Special packaging Additional price

Special packaging for extended technical requirements

Cardboard packaging with wax coating (moisture protection), internal bracing, tilt indicators

A 6 0

Rated current modules/rating plugs Additional price

Rated current In A

Only one module is possible per circuit breaker (not in conjunction with electronic release ETU15B). As standard the overcurrent releases are equipped with a rated current module which is equal to the maximum rated cir-cuit breaker current (In max). The rated current of the selected rated current module must be smaller than In max.

For size I, II 250 B 0 2 Without

315 B 0 3 Without

400 B 0 4 Without

500 B 0 5 Without

630 B 0 6 Without

800 B 0 8 Without

1000 B 1 0 Without

For size I, II, III 1250 B 1 2 Without

1600 B 1 6 Without

For size II, III 2000 B 2 0 Without

2500 B 2 5 Without

3200 B 3 2 Without

4000 B 4 0 Without

For size III 5000 B 5 0 Without

6300 B 6 3 Without

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/25Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Only possible with motorized operating mechanism.2) Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or

"F12".3) Only for circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism, not possible

with order codes "C11", "C12".

4) Not available for non-automatic air circuit breakers. 5) Overexcited, i.e. opening time 50 ms (standard > 80 ms).6) Only possible if the 14th position of the Order No. for the circuit breaker is

"A", i.e. "without 1st auxiliary release".

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z

Additional price

and additional order code(s)@ @ @ + . . . + . . .

Code for "Further versions"–Z

Indication/operator control elements, door sealing frames 5-digit mechanical operating cycles counter1) C 0 1

Electrical ON button in the operator panel2) Possible only for circuit breakers with closing solenoid.

Button with sealing cap C 1 1

Key operation with lock CES C 1 2

Storage status signal switches2) (S21)

1 NO C 2 0

Ready-to-close signal switch (S20) 1 NO C 2 2

Signal switches2) For the first auxiliary release (S22) C 2 6

For the second auxiliary release (S23) C 2 7

Motor shutdown switch in the operator panel3) S 2 5 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of

the mechanical OFF pushbuttonS 2 4

Door sealing frames T 4 0

Reclosing lockouts and remote resets Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout K 0 1

Tripped signal switch2)4) 1 CO K 0 7

Remote reset solenoid for displays and reset buttons including automatic reset of the reclosing lockout

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

-- 24 K 1 0-- 48 K 1 1120 125 K 1 2208 ... 250 208 ... 250 K 1 3Motorized operating mechanisms and closing/opening solenoids Motorized operating mechanisms Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"

Motor

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

-- 24 ... 30 M 0 1-- 48 ... 60 M 0 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 0 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 0 6

Closing solenoids suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON periodOnly possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"

Activation solenoids

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

-- 24 M 2 1-- 30 M 2 2-- 48 M 2 3

-- 60 M 2 4110 110 M 2 5230 220 M 2 6

Closing solenoids5) – unsuitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON periodOnly possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"

Activation solenoids

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

-- 24 M 3 1-- 48 M 3 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 3 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 3 6

Opening solenoids (shunt releases)6) – not suitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period

Activation solenoids

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

-- 24 M 4 1-- 48 M 4 3110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 4 5208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 4 6

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/26 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) Padlocks not included in scope of supply. 2) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-

ify order code "F02" or "F12" for withdrawable circuit breaker only.

3) Additional voltage transformers are required for connection of the measure-ment function Plus, see page 15/43.

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)

@@@ + . . . + . . .

Additional price

Code for"Further versions" -Z

Order code for fixed-mounted version

Order code for with-drawable version

Interlocks, covers, position indicator switches @ @ @ @ @ @

Mutual mechanical interlockings(interlocking module with Bowden wire 2 m)

Fixed-mounted circuit breaker

For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frame

For guide frames

For withdrawable circuit breakers

S

--

--

--

5 5 --

R

R

R

--

5

5

5

--

5

6

7

Arc chute covers

Not available for- 1000 V version (order code "A05")- DC version- 4000 A size II

3-poleSize ISize IISize III

------

RRR

111

000

4-poleSize ISize IISize III

------

RRR

111

000

Shutters2-partlockablewith padlocks1)

3-poleSize ISize IISize III

------

RRR

222

111

4-poleSize ISize IISize III

------

RRR

222

111

Position indicator switches for guide frames

Connected position

1 CO

3 CO

Test position

1 CO

2 CO

Discon-nected position1 CO

1 CO

--

--

R

R

1

1

5

6

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z

and additional order code(s)

Additional price

@ @ @ + . . . + . . .

Code for "Further versions" -Z

Communication and measurement functionsBreaker status sensor (BSS) F 0 1

PROFIBUS communications interface2) Including COM15 and breaker status sensor (BSS)

F 0 2

MODBUS communications interface2) Including COM16 and breaker status sensor (BSS)

F 1 2

Measurement function Plus (without PROFIBUS/MODBUS communications interface)3)

F 0 5

Overload and short-circuit protection for neutral conductorsInternal current transformers for N conductors Only possible with 4-pole circuit breakers with ETU27B to ETU76B

Size I F 2 3

Size II F 2 3

Size III F 2 3

EMC filtersEMC filters Common-mode interference

suppressor filters (e.g. in IT net-works, caused by frequency converters)Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB.

F 3 1

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/27Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.2) Padlock not included in the scope of supply.

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)

@@@ + . . . + . . .

Code for"Further versions" -Z

Order code for fixed-mounted version

Add. price for fixed-mounted ver-sion

Order code for with-drawable version

Add. price for withdraw-able version

Locking devices @ @ @ @ @ @

Locking devices against unauthorized closing, in the operator panelThe disconnector unit fulfills the requirements for main circuit break-ers acc. to EN 60204-1

Made by CES

Made by IKON

Assembly kit FORTRESS or Castell1)

Assembly kit for padlocks2)

Made by Ronis

Made by Profalux

S

S

S

S

S

S

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

3

5

7

8

9

S

S

S

S

S

S

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

3

5

7

8

9

EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of the mechanical OFF pushbutton

S 2 4 S 2 4

Locking devices against unauthorized closing, for withdrawable circuit breakersThe disconnector unit fulfills the requirements for main circuit breakers acc. to EN 60204-1, consisting of a lock in the cabinet door, active in the connected position;the function is retained when the cir-cuit breaker is replaced

Made by CES

Made by Ronis

Made by Profalux

--

--

--

R

R

R

6

6

6

1

8

0

Locking devices for operating mechanism handles with padlock2)

S 3 3 S 3 3

Locking devices to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakersSafety lock for mounting on the circuit breaker

Made by CES

Made by Profalux

Made by Ronis

--

--

--

S

S

S

7

7

7

1

5

6

Locking mechanisms Locking mechanisms to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breaker in disconnected positions, consisting of Bowden wire and lock in the cabinet door

Not possible in combination with order code "R30" or "R50".

Made by CES

Made by Profalux

Made by Ronis

--

--

--

R

R

R

8

8

8

1

5

6

Locking mechanisms

Not possible in combination with order code "R81", "R85" or "R86".

To prevent opening of the cabinet door in: ON position (fixed-mounted version)/in connected position (withdrawable version)

To prevent movement with the cabinet door open

S

--

3 0 R

R

3

5

0

0

Connection methods for auxiliary conductorsConnections for screwless terminals (tension spring)

N 6 1 P 6 1

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Options

15/28 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) Only horizontal connection and vertical connection are available for circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C.

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. andindicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z"1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Zand additional order code(s)@ @ @

+ . . . + . . .

Code for "Further versions"–Z

For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frames or for guide frames1)

Add. price 3-pole

Add. price 4-pole

To select this connection method, the 12th digit of the Order No. for the circuit breaker must be a "6"

Connection methods for main circuit connections

Top and bottom: accessible from front, single hole

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A

PPPPP

00000

00000

Top and bottom: accessible from front, double hole

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A

PPPPP

00000

11111

Top: horizontal, double holeBottom: accessible from front, single hole

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A

PPPPP

00000

77777

Top: verticalBottom: horizontal

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A

PPPPPP

111111

888888

Top: connecting flangeBottom: horizontal

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A

PPPPP

11111

99999

Top: horizontalBottom: vertical

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A

PPPPPP

222222

333333

For fixed-mounted circuit breakers Add. price 3-pole

Add. price 4-pole

To select this connection method, the 12th digit of the Order No. for the circuit breaker must be a "2"

Connection methods for main circuit connections

Top: horizontalBottom: accessible from front, single hole

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 A

NNNNN

11111

11111

Top: vertical Bottom: horizontal

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A

NNNNNN

222222

000000

Top: horizontalBottom: vertical

Size I, up to 1600 ASize II, up to 2000 ASize II, up to 2500 ASize II, up to 3200 ASize III, up to 4000 ASize III, up to 5000 A

NNNNNN

222222

444444

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/29Siemens LV 1 · 2009

■ Overview

Determination of the number of auxiliary supply connectors required

For ordering the auxiliary supply connectors see under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Guide Frames for AC Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers", pages 15/30 to 15/33 and under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Auxiliary Conductor Connections, Auxiliary Supply Connectors", page 15/39.

This selection is only required if the guide frame is ordered under a separate Order No.

The required number of auxiliary supply connectors depends on: • Operating mechanism type• Electronic trip unit with/without current transformer• Type and number of auxiliary releases• Number of auxiliary switches• COM15/COM16 communication interface

Number of auxil-iary supply connectors

Terminal

a First auxiliary supply connector X6 always required. 1 X6

b b1 b2 b3

Operating mechanisms Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical closing Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closingManual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing

0 0

+1X6 X5

c c1 c2

c3 c4

Electronic trip units Electronic trip units ETU15B, ETU25B, ETU27B Electronic trip units ETU45B, ETU76B (internal CubicleBUS)

Connections for external current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor and ground-fault protection Current transformer installed in the N conductor (required with 3-pole circuit breakers if c2 is not selected)Current transformer in the neutral point of the transformer (required if c2 or c3 is not selected)

0+1

+1+1

X8

X8 X8

d d1 d2

Auxiliary releases With/without 1st auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F1) 2nd auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F2, undervoltage trip unit F3, delayable undervoltage trip unit F4)

0+1

X6 X5

e e1 e2

Auxiliary switch blocks 1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC 1st and 2nd auxiliary switch block 4 NO + 4 NC or 6 NO + 2 NC or 5 NO + 3 NC (required if b3 or d2 is not selected)

0 +1

X6 X5

f f1 f2

Communication modules Without communication module COM15/COM16 With communication module COM15/COM16 – occupies the entire terminal strip X7, making the following options no longer possible: • Tripped signal switch S24 • Stored-energy status indication S21 • Electrical ON button S10 • Signaling switch on first and second auxiliary release S22 + S23

0+1 X7

g g1 g2 g3 g4

g5

g6 g7 g8

Optional signals/accessories Tripped signal switch S24 (only possible if f2 is not selected) Stored-energy status indication S21 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 is not selected) Electrical ON button S10 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 or g2 is not selected) Signal switch on first auxiliary release S22 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1, g2 or g3 is not selected) Signal switch on second auxiliary release S23 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1, g2, g3 or g4 is not selected)

Ready-to-close indicator switch S20 Motor shutdown switch S12 (only possible if motorized operating mechanism is selected) Remote reset solenoid F7 (required if c2 is not selected)

+1+1+1+1

+1

00

+1

X7 X7 X7 X7

X7

X6 X5 X8

h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors (max. 4)

NS

E0_

0110

4

X8X7 X6 X5

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/30 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

■ Selection and ordering dataGuide frames for AC circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers

For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/24.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.

2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Switching capacity Icu

DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Basic price per PU

A kA kg

Front main circuit connection, single holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000

Horizontal main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000

Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,

test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable

Size ISize IISize III

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with with very high switching capacity A 0 5

Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/31Siemens LV 1 · 2009

For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see the previous page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.

2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Switching capacity Icu

DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Basic price per PU

A kA kg

Vertical main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 52.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 70.000III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000III 6300 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 74.000

Main circuit connection connecting flangesI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000

Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,

test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable

Size ISize IISize III

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5

Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/32 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.

2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Switching capacity Icu

DT Guide frames for 4-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Basic price per PU

A kA kg

Front main circuit connection, single holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000

Front main circuit connection, double holeI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000

Horizontal main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000

Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,

test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable

Size ISize IISize III

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5

Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/33Siemens LV 1 · 2009

For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see the previous page. All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/28.1) Front connections are tinned as standard.

2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

Switching capacity Icu

DT Guide frames for 4-pole circuit breakers/ non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Basic price per PU

A kA kg

Vertical main circuit connectionI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 62.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 119.000III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000III 6300 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 124.000

Main circuit connection connecting flangesI 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000

Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT)With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,

test position 1 CO contact,disconnected position 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,test position 2 CO contacts,disconnected position 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2-part,lockable

Size ISize IISize III

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 . – . . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

Rated voltage 1000 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 0 5Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5

Rated voltage 1150 V ACSize II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)2)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connectionSize I A 0 8Size II A 0 8Size III A 0 8

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/34 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) For replacement in existing circuit breakers please specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering.

2) With the rated current module selected, the maximum rated current In max of the circuit breaker must not be exceeded. The following applies In � In max.

3) For direct measurement of the ground-fault current, e.g. in the neutral point of the transformer, a 1200 A/1 A current transformer, class 1, is required. The internal load of the SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 m. If the ground-fault cur-rent is to be determined using the vectorial sum of the phases, a current transformer must be installed in the neutral conductor.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kgProtective devices with device holder and optional measurement function1)

Type With protection function

Measurement function

ETU15B LI Without C 3WL9 311-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720

ETU25B LSI Without C 3WL9 312-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720

ETU27B LSING Without C 3WL9 312-7AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720

ETU45B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 314-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720(without display)

With measurement function Plus

B 3WL9 314-5AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720

ETU76B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 317-6AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720With measurement function Plus

B 3WL9 317-6AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720

Rated current modules/Rating plugs2)

For size Rated current In (A)

I, II 250 B 3WL9 111-0AA51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010315 B 3WL9 111-0AA52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010400 B 3WL9 111-0AA53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010500 B 3WL9 111-0AA54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

630 B 3WL9 111-0AA55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010800 B 3WL9 111-0AA56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

1000 B 3WL9 111-0AA57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

I, II, III 1250 B 3WL9 111-0AA58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0101600 B 3WL9 111-0AA61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

II, III 2000 B 3WL9 111-0AA62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0102500 B 3WL9 111-0AA63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0103200 B 3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0104000 B 3WL9 111-0AA65-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

III 5000 B 3WL9 111-0AA66-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.0106300 B 3WL9 111-0AA67-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010

Ground-fault modules3)

GFM AT 45B (only for ETU45B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030

GFM AT 55B–76B (only for ETU76B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030

Displays4-line displays for ETU45B B 3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060

Current transformers for N conductor protectionInternal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200(not for ETU release 2) Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500

Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200Only for ETU release 2 Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500

External transf. for N conductors(T5, see Technical Information LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement Method")

Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.380Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.680

External transf. for N conductorsWith copper connection pieces (T5, see Technical Information LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement Method")

Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.260Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.500

EMC filtersEMC filtersCommon-mode interference sup-pressor filters (e.g. in IT networks, caused by frequency converters)Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB

Not for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280

Only for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280

NS

E0_

0161

0b

3WL9 31.-.AA.0-0AA1

� � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0

� �

� � � � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� �

��

� � � ��

3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AA2.-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AA3.-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/35Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Can only be used in conjunction with "automatic reset of reclosing lockout", e.g. "–Z" + "K01", 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0.

2) Required if communication is retrofitted.

3) Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.4) Padlock not included in the scope of supply.■ Start of delivery on request.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

More accessories for electronic releases Sealable covers For ETU15B to

ETU45B

For ETU76

B

B

3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AT46-0AA0

1

1

1 unit

1 unit

103

103

0.050

0.050

Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout Spare part for option K01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050

Remote reset solenoids1) 24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200For mechanical tripped indicator

Spare part for option K10 to K13, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200

120 V AC/125 V DC

B 3WL9 111-0AK05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200

208-250 V AC/208-250 V DC

B 3WL9 111-0AK06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200

Retrofittable internal CubicleBUS wiring for connection to terminal X8 (without male connector2))

For ETU45B and ETU76B

B 3WL9 111-0AK30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8 (without male connector, not for ETU release 2)

D 3WL9 111-0AK31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8 for ETU release 2 (without male connector)

D 3WL9 111-0AK33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

Locking devicesProtective covers for mechanical ON/OFF Consisting of 2 transparent covers each for sealing or for attaching padlocks4), cover with 6.35 mm hole (for tool actua-tion), lock mount for safety lock for key operation

Without safety lockMade by CESMade by IKON

B

BB

3WL9 111-0BA21-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA03WL9 111-0BA24-0AA0

1

11

1 unit

1 unit1 unit

103

103103

0.100

0.3000.300

Locking devices against unauthorized closing, in the operator panelThe disconnector unit fulfills the ■ requirements for main circuit breakers according to EN 60204-1

Spare part for option S01 to S09, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Assembly kit FORTRESS or CASTELL3)

Made by RonisMade by KIRK-KeyMade by Profalux

Made by CESMade by IKONAssembly kit for padlocks4)

B

BB

B

BB

B

3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA33-0AA03WL9 111-0BA34-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA35-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA36-0AA03WL9 111-0BA38-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA41-0AA0

1

111

11

1

1 unit

1 unit1 unit1 unit

1 unit1 unit

1 unit

103

103103103

103103

103

0.200

0.4000.2700.250

0.2000.200

0.360

Locking devices against unauthorized closing, for withdrawable circuit breakers ■The disconnector unit fulfills the require-ments for main circuit breakers accord-ing to EN 60204-1, consisting of lock in the cabinet door, active in connected position; function is retained when circuit breaker is replaced

Spare part for option R60, R61, R68, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Made by CESMade by IKONMade by KIRK-KeyMade by RonisMade by Profalux

BBB

BB

3WL9 111-0BA51-0AA03WL9 111-0BA53-0AA03WL9 111-0BA57-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA58-0AA03WL9 111-0BA50-0AA0

11111

1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit

103103103103103

0.3000.3000.3000.3000.227

Locking devices for operating mecha-nism handle with padlock4)

Spare part for option S33, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

B 3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080

Locking devices against movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers Safety lock for mounting on the circuit breaker.

Spare part for opt. S71, S75, S76, ■see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Made by CESMade by IKONMade by ProfaluxMade by Ronis

Made by KIRK-Key

BBBB

B

3WL9 111-0BA73-0AA03WL9 111-0BA75-0AA03WL9 111-0BA76-0AA03WL9 111-0BA77-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BA80-0AA0

1111

1

1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit

1 unit

103103103103

103

0.3000.2000.3000.300

0.400

Interlocking systems 2 of the same keys for 3 switches, Locking device OFF position, Key-operated switch on operator panel. A maximum of 2 switches can be switched on.

Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360

ETU25B

NS

E0_

0098

3b

3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AK0.-0AA0

��

��

��

��

3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0

�������

3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0

�������

3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/36 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Locking mechanisms

Interlocking

To prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position, consisting of Bowden wire and lock in the cabinet door

Spare part for option R81, R85, R86, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent opening of the cabinet door" (order code "R30") or "Locking mechanism to prevent move-ment with the cabinet door open" (order code "R50").

Made by CESMade by IKONMade by ProfaluxMade by Ronis

BBBB

3WL9 111-0BA81-0AA03WL9 111-0BA83-0AA03WL9 111-0BA85-0AA03WL9 111-0BA86-0AA0

1111

1 unit1 unit1 unit1 unit

103103103103

0.8000.8000.8000.800

To prevent opening of the cabinet door in ON position (can be defeated)

Spare part for option S30, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Fixed mounting B 3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600

To prevent opening of the cabinet door (can be defeated)

Spare part for option R30, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position" (order codes "R81", "R85" or "R86").

Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

To prevent movement with the cabinet door open

Spare part for option R50, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.

Not possible in combination with "Locking mechanism to prevent movement of the withdrawable circuit breakers in disconnected position" (order codes "R81", "R85" or "R86").

Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

Interlocks Mutual mechanical interlocking, with 2000 mm Bowden wire(one required for each circuit breaker)

Fixed-mounted circuit breaker

Spare part for option S55, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

B 3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.700

Module for withdrawable circuit breaker with frame

Spare part for option R55, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

B 3WL9 111-0BB24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.130

When ordered separately

Module for guide frame

Spare part for option R56, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

B 3WL9 111-0BB22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100

Module for withdrawable circuit breaker

Spare part for option R57, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

B 3WL9 111-0BB23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

Adapter for size IIIWithdrawable circuit breaker

B 3WL9 111-0BB30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100

Couplings on the circuit breaker (with ring) for mutual interlocking Can be used in all circuit breakers

B 3WL9 112-8AH47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.160

Bowden wires 2000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.1503000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.2204500 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360

��������

3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0

3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0

NSE0_01886

3WL9 112-8HA47-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/37Siemens LV 1 · 2009

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Test devicesManual testers release 2 for electronic releases ETU15B to ETU76B

For testing the electronic release functions

B 3WL9 111-0AT32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100

Function testers C 3WL9 111-0AT44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.210For testing the tripping characteristics for electronic release ETU15B to ETU76B

Capacitor storage devicesCapacitor storage devices For shunt release

Storage time 5 min

Rated control supply voltage must match the rated control supply voltage of the shunt release

Rated control supply voltage/rated opera-tional voltage

AC 50/60 Hz V V DC

220 ... 240 220 ... 250

B 3WL9 111-0BA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.520

Suitable also for 3VL and 3WN circuit breakers

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/38 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or "F12".

2) X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames. If this is not already available, please order additionally (see pages 15/29 and 15/39).

3) Only in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.4) Not possible with motor shutdown switch.5) Not possible with electrical ON button.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Indicators, control elements Ready-to-close signal-ing switches1 NO contact

Spare part for option C22, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

Signaling switches1)2)

Spare part for option C26 and C27, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

1st or 2nd auxiliary releases

B 3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

Tripped signaling switches1)2)

1 CO

Spare part for option K07, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AH14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080

Operating cycles counters, mechanical3)

Spare part for option C01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100

Stored energy status signaling switches1)2)

1 NO contact

Spare part for option C20, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AH08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030

Position signaling switches for guide frames

Spare part for option R15 and R16, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

1st block (3 CO contacts)

B 3WL9 111-0AH11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200

2nd block (6 CO contacts)

B 3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400

Electrical ON buttons1)4)

(button+wiring)2), for operator panel. Possible only for circuit breakers with closing solenoid.

Spare part for option C11 and C12, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

With sealing cap B 3WL9 111-0AJ02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

With CES assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140

With BKS assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140

With IKON assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140

Motor shutdown switches5) (mounting on operator panel)

Spare part for option S25, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AJ06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100

EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttonsMushroom pushbutton instead of the mechanical OFF pushbutton

Spare part for option S24, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0

����������

3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0

� � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0

� � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AJ0.-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/39Siemens LV 1 · 2009

For a complete auxiliary current connection you must order:

Fixed-mounted version: $ + % + &

Withdrawable version: $ + ( + %

or

$ + )

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Auxiliary conductor connections Male connectors for circuit breakers $ B 3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100

Extension for the 1000 V male connector versions (male connector must be ordered separately)

B 3WL9 111-0AB02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150

Male connectors and extension for 1000 V B 3WL9 111-0AB10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000

Auxiliary supply connec-tors for circuit breakers or guide frames%

Screw connection (SIGUT)

B 3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070

Screwless connection method (tension spring)

B 3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070

Coding kits for fixed-mounted version (X5 to X8) &

B 3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

Sliding contact modules for guide frames ( B 3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100

One-part sliding contact modules for guide frames Screw connection (SIGUT))

B 3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120

Blanking blocks for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111-0AB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030

��

�����

3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0

���������

3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0

��

������

3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0

���������

3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0

�����

���

3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/40 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames. If this is not already available, please order additionally (see pages 15/29 and 15/39).

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Auxiliary releases Closing solenoids/shunt releases

24 V DC 100 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

110 ... 125 V DC/110 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

220 V DC/230 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

24 V DC 5 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800

Undervoltage releases

Instantaneous

24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730

Delayed

48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740

110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740

220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740

380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740

Operating mechanisms Motorized operating mechanisms1)

24 ... 30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510

48 ... 60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510

110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510

220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510

Auxiliary contacts Auxiliary switch blocks 2 NO + 2 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.180

2 NO B 3WL9 111-0AG02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080

1 NO + 1 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070

3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0AE0.-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0AE1.-0AA0

� � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AF0.-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/41Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Not available for 1000 V version, 1150 V version, DC version and size II with rated circuit breaker current of 4000 A.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Door sealing frames, covers, shutters Door sealing frames

Spare part for option T40, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.

B 3WL9 111-0AP01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360

Protective covers, IP55cannot be used in conjunction with door sealing frames, cover remov-able and can be opened on both sides

B 3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600

Shutters

Spare part for option R21, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.860

4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.070

Arc chutesArc chutes

690 V Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.110

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.680

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.980

1000 V/1150 V Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.140

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.620

Arc chute covers1)

Assembly kit for guide frame

Spare part for option R10, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/26.

3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS36-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS38-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.050

4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.340

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.300

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.210

Withdrawable part codingWithdrawable part coding B 3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400By customer, for 36 coding variants

���������

3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AP0.-0AA0

��

������

3WL9 111-0AS0.-0AA0

��������

3WL9 111-0AS3.-0AA0

�������

3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/42 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) For 60 kA ground short-circuit current, order 2.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Ground-fault protectionGround-fault protection between the guide frame and the withdrawable circuit breakers For 30 kA ground short-circuit current1)

Contacting module for guide frame

Size I, II B 3WL9 111-0BA01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.330

Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350

Contacting modules for withdrawable circuit breakers

3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.250

Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.530

Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.270

4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.500

Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850

Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.950

Support bracketsSupport bracketsFor mounting fixed-mounted circuit breakers on vertical plane, only for sizes I and II (1 set = 2 units)

B 3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.000

����������

3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0

�������

3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0

��

���

��

3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/43Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Each CubicleBUS module is supplied with a 0,2 m factory-fitted cable to connect the modules with each other. A longer factory-fitted cable is required for connection to the circuit breaker.

2) Manual for MODBUS communication solution available on request. 3) A 24 V DC power supply unit is required.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

CubicleBUS modules1)

Digital output modules with rotary coding switch, relay outputs

B 3WL9 111-0AT26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240

Digital output modules, configurable, relay outputs B 3WL9 111-0AT20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.310

Digital input modules B 3WL9 111-0AT27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240

Analog output modules B 3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240

Zone Selective Interlocking modules B 3WL9 111-0AT21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240

Parameterization systems Breaker Data Adapters (BDA)3)

Parameterization, operation, monitoring and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers using the local interface; Breaker Data Adapter, connection cable to the SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker and to the programming device (e.g. notebook); can be run with Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM 1.4.0-01 and higher

B 3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.900

BDA Plus3) Same as BDA, but with additional Ethernet interface for connection to Ethernet/Intra-net/Internet

B 3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200

Connection cables for BDA Plus

Connection cable for connection of BDA Plus to terminal X8 of the SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker. Required if neither COM15 nor COM16 nor other external CubicleBUS modules are available, length 2 m.

B 3WL9 111-0BC21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350

Switch ES Power parameteriza-tion software

Calibration, operation, monitoring, and diag-nostics of SENTRON circuit breakers via PROFIBUS DP; runs under Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional, requires additional PROFIBUS card e.g. CP5613

A 3ZS2 311-0CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 133 0.200

Accessories for communicationsPreassembled cables for CubicleBUS modules

0.2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16

B 3WL9 111-0BC04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020

1 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16

B 3WL9 111-0BC02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050

2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL with COM15/COM16

B 3WL9 111-0BC03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060

2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL without COM15/COM16

B 3WL9 111-0BC05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070

SENTRON manuals for communication solutions2)

Detailed description of the communication functions for SENTRON circuit breakers incl. installation, connection, commissioning, data transmission to PLC as well as description of Switch ES Power and BDA.

English Token fee on request A5E0151353-01

German Token fee on request A5E0151347-01

To be ordered from: http://www.click4business-supplies.de

Free download from: http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals

Voltage transformers, 3-pole, for SENTRON 3WL with measure-ment function Plus

380 ... 690 V/100 V, class 0.5 B 3WL9 111-0BB68-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600

All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.

� � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0

� � � � � � � � � �

3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/44 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) If retrofitted, a measuring accuracy of 3 % is achieved.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU (UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Retrofitting and spare parts for communication PROFIBUS retrofit kits

Retrofit kit for PROFIBUS communications including COM15, BSS and set of cables for all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases

B 3WL9 111-0AT12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260

COM15 PROFIBUS modules

B 3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140

MODBUS retrofit kits

Retrofit kit for MODBUS communications including COM16, BSS and set of cables for all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases

B 3WL9 111-0AT14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260

COM16 MODBUS modules

B 3WL9 111-0AT17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140

Breaker status sensor (BSS)

B 3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120

Measurement function Plus1)

For all ETUs except ETU release 2 (voltage transformer required)

B 3WL9 111-0AT03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250

Measurement function Plus1)

For ETU release 2 (voltage transformer required)

B 3WL9 111-0AT04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250

All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.

� � � � � � �

�� ��������

������

����������

��� !�!��

3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0

���

���

��!

������

���

���!�!��

3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/45Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) In the case of vertical connection size I, up to 1000 A one 3WL9 111–0AM01-0AA0 vertical connection is required, up to 1600 A two 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 vertical connections are required.

2) In the case of vertical connection size II, up to 2500 A one 3WL9 111–0AM02-0AA0 vertical connection is required, up to 3200 A two 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 vertical connections are required.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kgMain conductor connections, fixed mounting (essential accessory)

Specified for each connection

Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at top

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.500

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.100

Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at bottom

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200

Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN 43673, double hole at top

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.400Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.400Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.500Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.400

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.800

Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN43673, double hole at bottom

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.700

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AL62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AL63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400

Rear vertical main circuit connections

Size I1), up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500

Size II2), up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200

Size III, up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.000

3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0

��� !�!�!

��� !�!��

��� !�!��

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/46 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

1) When using front-accessible main circuit connections (withdrawable circuit breakers) supports are required.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kgMain conductor connections, withdrawable versions (essential accessory)

Specified for each connection

3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0

Front-accessible main circuit connections, single hole at top or at bottom1)

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.100Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200

3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0

Front-accessible main circuit connections, acc. to DIN 43673, double hole at top or at bottom1)

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.700

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.700Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.600

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400

3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0

Supports for front and DIN connecting bars

3-pole for 3 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.350

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.420

4-pole for 4 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200

Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200

Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.200

Rear vertical main circuit connections

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.660Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.870

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.150Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.490Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.580

Size III, up to 5000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.380

3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0

Size III, up to 6300 A (3 busbar connection pieces for 3-pole circuit breakers)

B 3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 19.170

Size III, up to 6300 A (4 busbar connection pieces for 4-pole circuit breakers)

B 3WL9 111-0AN20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.410

Size III, up to 6300 A (4 busbar connection pieces for 4-pole circuit breakers)

B 3WL9 111-0AN10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.300

Rear horizontal circuit connections

Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.020Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN35-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.240

3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0

Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN36-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.170

Size III, up to 5000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN37-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.860

Connecting flanges Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.610Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN25-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.640

Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.980Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.020Size II, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AN28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.310

Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.370

��� !�!��

��� !�!��

��� !�!��

��� !�!��

��

� !

�!��

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/47Siemens LV 1 · 2009

1) Please specify the circuit breaker ID No. in plain text when ordering.

Designation DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Conversion setsFor converting fixed-mounted circuit breakers into withdrawable circuit breakersGuide frames and sliding contact modules must be ordered separately.

Number of poles Size

3-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.100

II B 3WL9 111-0BC12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.900

III B 3WL9 111-0BC13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.100

4-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400

II B 3WL9 111-0BC15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.450

III B 3WL9 111-0BC16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 10.700

Main contact elementsYou must specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering!Specified for each connection (depending on the number of poles on the circuit breaker, order 3 or 4 units)

Sizes In max Order No. is automatically adapted to the circuit breaker ID number

I Up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM90 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)

II Up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AM91 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)

II Up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AM92 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)

III Up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM93 1 1 unit 103 On req.L1Y1)��� !�!��

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/48 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

Conversion for the following applications is possible

Schematics in as-supplied state Version Size DT Order No. Price per PU

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

kg

Withdrawable short-circuits, grounding and bridging unitsTop and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded

3-pole

Up to 1600 A

I C 3WL9 111-0BD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 30.000

Up to 3200 A

II C 3WL9 111-0BD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 40.500

Up to 6300 A

III C 3WL9 111-0BD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 65.000

4-pole

Up to 1600 A

I C 3WL9 111-0BD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 35.000

Up to 3200 A

II C 3WL9 111-0BD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 46.000

Up to 6300 A

III C 3WL9 111-0BD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 70.000

NSE0_01113

L1 L2 L3 NS

E0_

0111

8

N L1 L2 L3

NS

E0_

0111

9

(as-supplied state)

Top and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded (as-supplied state)

Top part of system is short-circuited and grounded, infeed from bottom

Withdrawable bridging unit, infeed and outgoing terminals are permanently connected to each other

Bottom part of system is short-circuited and grounded, infeed from top

NSE0_01113

L1 L2 L3 NS

E0_

0111

8

N L1 L2 L3

NS

E0_

0111

9

NSE0_01112

L1 L2 L3

NS

E0_

0111

6

N L1 L2 L3

NS

E0_

0111

7

NSE0_01115

����������

���������

NSE0_01114

L1 L2 L3 NS

E0_

0112

0

L1 L2 L3N NS

E0_

0112

1

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/49Siemens LV 1 · 2009

■ Options

Structure of the Order No.

Accessories: with first order (components are already mounted)

Accessories: for retrofitting (components for subsequent fitting)

Documentation

Free download of documentation from http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals

■ More information

Up-to-date information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sentron

3WL1ÔÔÒ–ÖéâÕÓ–ÓáÜÔ An important prerequisite for computer-based order processing is that order numbers must be structured according to standardized criteria.

They are used as an unambiguous means of communication for various purposes:

• Offer processing Selection and configuration

• Order processingOrdering Order confirmationHandling warehouse products Order processing at the supply bases Delivery and shipment

• Reporting and planning

• Service and warranty

The standardized structure ensures that only one Order No. has to be adminis-tered for one device.

This saves time and effort during planning, configuring, ordering and stock keeping, and consequently above all it saves costs.

The example opposite explains the various positions within an Order No.

Example5th position: Size Size II Ô

6th and 7th positions:

Max. rated circuit breaker current In max

In max = 2000 A ÔÒ

8th position: Switching capacity class

High breaking capacity "H": 100 kA

Ö

9th position: Electronic releases ETU76B with pixel graphics display

é

10th position: Electronic release supplement

... with ground-fault protection â

11th position: Number of poles 3-pole Õ

12th position: Installation type Fixed mounting, main circuit connections on rear, vertical

Ó

13th position: Operating mechanisms

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing

Ó

14th position: 1st auxiliary release Shunt release AC 50/60 Hz 110 V

á

15th position: 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release Ü

16th position: Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC Ô

Example 3WL1ÔÓØ–ÖåâÕÓ–ÓáÜÕ–õ áÒÔ Additional accessory components can be ordered ready-mounted.

These supplements are identified by "-Z".

Even with additional components, one Order No. is sufficient.

"–Z" with order code Communications interface "Standard" + Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) + communication module COM15 for connection to PROFIBUS DP

õ áÒÔ

Example Additional accessories which are not intended to be ready-mounted in the factory, such as spare parts for storage, can also be ordered separately from the circuit breaker.

Accessories for retrofitting are identified by the Order No. stem 3WL9.

3WL9ÓÓÓ–ÒÁÜÔÓ–ÒÜÜÒ

Protective cover for mechanical ON/OFFwithout lock

Operating manual Complete set

German/English Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AN1 Delivery time class CFrench/Italian Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AJ1 On requestSpanish/Portuguese Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AL1 On request

ManualCommunication

German Order No. A5E0151347-01English Order No. A5E0151353-01

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions

15/50 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

For general data see page 15/6.

Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age: Order with "-Z" and order code "A05".

All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards. 1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-

ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Information LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".

An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

DT 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Price per PUA kg

Horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64,000

Vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85,000

Front main circuit connection, single holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000

Front main circuit connection, double holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price

Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without

DC

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

DT 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Price per PUA kg

Horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77,000

Vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103,000

Front main circuit connection, single holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000

Front main circuit connection, double holeII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price

Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . . . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

3-pole 4-pole

Rated voltage 1000 V DC

Size II Up to 2000 A A 0 5

Size II Up to 4000 A A 0 5

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

3-pole, withdrawable versions

15/51Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.

All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-tions", page 15/24 onwards.

1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-

ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".

3) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

4) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.

An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

DT 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Price per PU

A kg

Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/53)

II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000

With guide frames, connecting flangesII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price

Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 3 . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

3-pole

Rated voltage 1000 V DC

Size II4) Up to 2000 A A 0 5

Size II4) Up to 4000 A A 0 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)

Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.

Size II A 0 8

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

4-pole, withdrawable versions

15/52 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Note: For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.

All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-tions", page 15/24 onwards.

1) Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.2) For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-

ing capacity Icc for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".

3) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

4) If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-ify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.

An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-matic air circuit breakers. Available only directly from the company "mat" – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current In max.

DT 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.

Order No. For Order No. supplements, see page 15/23

Price per PU

A kg

Without guide frames (for guide frames, see page 15/53)

II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000

82.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000With guide frames, vertical main circuit connectionII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000

With guide frames, connecting flangesII 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000II 40001) B 3WL12 40-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000Non-automatic air circuit breakers2) Order No. supplements Add. price

Without electronic release AA WithoutStandard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL1 2 . 0 – 8 . . 4 . – . . . . –Z@@@

Additional price

4-pole

Rated voltage 1000 V DC

Size II4) Up to 2000 A A 0 5

Size II4) Up to 4000 A A 0 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame3)

Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.

Size II A 0 8

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

15

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Accessories and spare parts

15/53Siemens LV 1 · 2009* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

■ Selection and ordering data

Guide frames for DC non-automatic air circuit breakers

Guide frames for 4-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers

All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.1) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K

lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker currentIn max

DT For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Price per PU

A kg

Front main circuit connection, single holeII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000Horizontal main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000Vertical main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000Main circuit connection connecting flangesII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000

Order No. supplements Add. priceNumber of auxiliary supply connectors 3-pole

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT) With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected 1 CO contact,

test 1 CO contact,disconnected 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,test 2 CO contacts,disconnected 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2 parts, lockable

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z@@@

Add. price

Rated voltage 1000 V DC

Size II A 0 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection

Size II A 0 8

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Accessories and Spare Parts

15/54 Siemens LV 1 · 2009

15

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

For guide frames for 3-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers see previous page

All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "–Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.1) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K

lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker currentIn max

DT For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers

PU(UNIT, SET, M)

PS* PG Weight per PU approx.Order No.

(Order No. supplements required according to table below)

Price per PU

A kg

Front main circuit connection, single holeII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000Front main circuit connection, double hole II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000Horizontal main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000Vertical main circuit connectionII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000Main circuit connection connecting flangesII 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000

Order No. supplements Add. priceNumber of auxiliary supply connectors 4-pole

Without1 connector2 connectors3 connectors4 connectorsFor required number of auxiliary supply connectors, see table on page 15/29

01234

Without

Type of auxiliary circuit connectionsWithoutWith screw connections (SIGUT) With screwless connection method (tension spring)

012

Without

Position indicator switchesWithout 0 WithoutOption 1 Connected 1 CO contact,

test 1 CO contact,disconnected 1 CO contact

1

Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,test 2 CO contacts,disconnected 1 CO contact

2

ShuttersWithoutWith shutter, 2 parts, lockable

AB

Without

Add "–Z" to the complete Order No. and indicate the appropriate order code(s).

Order No. with "–Z" and additional order code

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 163WL9 2 1 2 – . . . . . – . . A1 –Z@@@

Add. price

Rated voltage 1000 V DC

Size II A 0 5

Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame1)

Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection

Size II A 0 8

© Siemens AG 2009

Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

15

15/2 Introduction

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)General data

15/6 - Design15/12 - Function15/19 - Configuration15/24 - Technical specifications

Project planning aids15/32 - Characteristic curves15/34 - Dimensional drawings15/47 - Schematics15/49 - More information

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)General data

15/50 - Technical specificationsProject planning aids

15/51 - Characteristic curves15/51 - Dimensional drawings15/55 - Schematics15/56 - More information

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices – Air Circuit Breakers

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/2 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Overview

✓ Standard-- Not available❑ Optional1) ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.

3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.

Air circuit breakers3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Size I, II, III II

Rated current In A 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300

1000, 2000, 4000

Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole

Rated operational voltage Ue

V ACV DC

Up to 690/1000/1150--

--Up to 1000

Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity at 500 V AC

kA

Size I

55/66

Size II

66/80/100

Size III

100/150 (3-pole), 130 (4-pole)

30/25/20 (at 300/600/1000 V DC)

Endurance Operat-ing cycles

20000 15000 10000 15000

Mounting position

Degree of protectionWith cover IP55 IP55Without cover (with door sealing frame)

IP41 IP41

Dimensions 3-/4-pole

W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590

H mm 434 434 434 434

D mm

H mm

D mm

291

465.5

471

291

465.5

471

291

465.5

471

291

465.5

471

Type ETU15B1) ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76BSolid-state releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Short-time delayed short-circuit protection

-- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Instantaneous short-circuit protection

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Neutral conductor protection -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓

Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ ❑ ❑

Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- -- ❑ ❑

LCD, 4-line -- -- -- ❑ --

LCD, graphic -- -- -- -- ✓

Communication through PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS

-- -- -- ❑ ❑

Measurement function Plus -- -- -- ❑ ❑

Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- -- ✓

Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- -- ✓

CubicleBUS -- -- -- ✓ ✓

Size IIISize IISize I

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

NSS0_00535

H

W D

NS

E0_

0110

6a

NS

E0_

0110

7a

NS

E0_

0110

8a

NS

E0_

0110

9a Rating Plug

NS

E0_

0111

1a

Fixed mounting

Withdrawable

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

15/3Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

Introduction

15

Switching capacity

1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be

greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.

Size I II III

Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13

Switching capacity class N

S

N

S

H

H

C3-pole

C4-pole

Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC

Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC

Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)

Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)

Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 1544) 1544)

Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)

0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100

2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80

3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC

kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

Up to 690 V AC

kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100

N S N S H H C C

Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity

These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical specifications by orange backgrounds.

N

S

H

C

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

Introduction

15/4 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

SENTRON 3WL:Superior individual products integrated into uniform power distribution systems – up to and including industry-specific industrial and infrastructure solutions

$ Guide frame

% Main circuit connection, front, flange, horizontal, vertical

& Position indicator switch

( Grounding contact, leading

) Shutter

* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module

+ External CubicleBUS modules

, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release

- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system

. Auxiliary switch block

/ Door sealing frame

0 Interlocking set for base plate

1 Transparent panel, function insert

2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated

3 Motorized operating mechanism

4 Operating cycles counter

5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)

6 Protective devices with device holder, solid-state releases (ETU)

7 Remote reset solenoid

8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)

9 Four-line display

: Ground-fault protection module

; Rated current module

< Measuring function module

= Circuit breaker

18

17

1620

15

21

23

22

24

14

19

6

45

7

8

9

2

25

10

11

12

13

3

1

NSE

0_01

887a

© Siemens AG 2009

SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices — Air Circuit Breakers

15/5Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

Introduction

15

Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)

Features• Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP

or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL

• The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories allows easy retrofitting of all communication components

• Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the possibility of linking up external input and output modules to the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL

• Innovative software products for parameterization, operation, monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers, both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/Intranet/Internet

• Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation solutions

Communication: • For air circuit breakers with optional communication function

(ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release) see Catalog LV 1.

• For accessories see Catalog LV 1. • For more information see also the Chapter "Power

Management System" and "Software for Power Distribution".

5

1

21

22

19

8 6

2

4

20

14 15 16 17 18 7

91

3

10

11

12

13

SENTRON 3VLElectronic LCD ETU releaseElectronic ETU releaseCOM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSICOM20 PROFIBUS module2) complete with ZSIBreaker Data Adapter (BDA)BDA Plus with Ethernet interfaceBrowser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)SENTRON 3WLCOM15 PROFIBUS module1)

Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)

1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.2) For a MODBUS connection the COM21 module is required.

1234567891011

Electronic ETU releaseMeasurement function PlusZSI moduleDigital output module with relay contactsDigital output module with relay contacts, configurableAnalog output moduleDigital input moduleSwitch ES Power on PCPLC e.g. SIMATIC S7SIMATIC powercontrolPAC

1213141516171819202122

NS

E0_

0110

5h

PROFIBUS

Ethernet

CubicleBUS

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/6 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Design

Overview of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers

Versions

• Rated currents: 630 A to 6300 A• 3 sizes for different rated current ranges (see illustration

"Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Circuit Breakers")

• 3- and 4-pole versions• Rated operational voltage up to 690 V AC and 1000 V DC.

Special versions up to 1000 V AC and 1150 V AC available• 4 different switching capacity classes in the range from 55 kA

to 150 kA for AC applications and one switching capacity class for DC applications.

The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are supplied complete with operating mechanism (manual operating mechanism with me-chanical closing), solid-state release and auxiliary switches (2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts in the standard version), and can be equipped with auxiliary releases.

Installation types

Fixed-mounted or withdrawable version

Ambient temperaturesThe SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30. They are intended for use in enclosed areas where no severe operating conditions (e. g. dust, corrosive va-pors, damaging gases) are present.When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures must be provided.

Coordinated dimensionsThe dimensions of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers only differ in terms of the width of the device which depends on the number of poles and the size.Due to the nature of the design, the dimensions of devices with a withdrawable version are determined by the dimensions of the guide frames, which are slightly larger.

Non-automatic air circuit breakersA special version of circuit breaker is utilized as a non-automatic air circuit breaker. The non-automatic air circuit breakers are de-signed without an solid-state release system and do not perform any protection duties for the system.One potential application is the use as a bus coupler in systems with parallel feed-ins.The versions and features can be selected according to those of the circuit breakers.

Operating mechanismsThe circuit breakers are available with various optional operating mechanisms:• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing (stan-

dard design)• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical

closing• Motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electri-

cal closing

The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used for synchronization tasks.

NSE0_00887 o

HS

1008066

460 / 590 460 / 590

291 / 291 385 / 385

434 / 434 460 / 460

320 / 410 320 / 410

291 / 291 385 / 385

434 / 434 460 / 460

H

100

C

150 (3p)130 (4p)

704 / 914 704 / 914

291 / 291 385 / 385

434 / 434 460 / 460

SN

6655800

1000

1250

1600

630

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

3200

4000

4000

5000

6300

N

30

DC

The dimension for the depth of the circuit breaker is from the circuit breaker rear to the inner surface of the closed switchgear door.

Circuit breaker Breaking capacity DimensionsFixed-mounted,

With-drawable

3- /4-pole 3- /4-pole

Width

Depth

Height

Width

Depth

Height

Width

Depth

Height

Size

III

Size

ISi

ze II

at 500 V AC (kA) orcurated current (A)n max

at 300 V DC (kA)cc

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/7Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

Main circuit connections – connection types

Main circuit connections

All circuit breakers are equipped with horizontal main circuit connections on the rear for up to 5000 A as standard (horizontal connection to busbars). Exception: Circuit breakers of size II with max. rated current 4000 A. Circuit breakers with a max. rated current of 6300 A and circuit breakers size II with a max. rated current of 4000 A are equipped with vertical main connections (for upright busbars).

The following options are available, with all combinations of top and bottom connections possible:• Accessible from the front, single hole (for vertically installed

busbars)• Accessible from the front, double hole (holes according to

DIN 43673) (for vertically installed busbars)• At the rear, vertical (for vertically installed busbars)• Connecting flange (for direct connection to guide frame up to

4000 A).

Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections

Auxiliary circuit connections

The type of connection for the auxiliary switches depends on the type of installation:• Withdrawable version: The internal auxiliary switches are con-

nected to the male connector on the switch side. When fully in-serted, the connector makes a connection with the sliding contact module (see "Design", graphic "Guide Frame") in the guide frame. Various adapters can then be used to complete the wiring (see the graphic "Connection Options for Auxiliary Circuit Connections").

• Fixed mounting: In this case the auxiliary supply connectors are engaged directly onto the circuit breaker. The connectors are equipped with coding pins that prevent them being mistak-enly interchanged.

Operator panel

The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cut-out in the door providing access to all control elements and displays with the control cabinet door closed. The operator panels for all circuit breakers (fixed-mounted/with-drawable versions, 3-/4-pole) are identical. The operator panel ensures degree of protection IP41.

Safety and reliability

To protect the circuit breakers and plant against unauthorized switching as well as the maintenance and operator personnel, the system contains many locking devices. Others can be retrofitted.

Other safety features include:• Infeed from above or below, as required• Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed,

as standard• Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against move-

ment, as standard• High degree of protection with cover IP55• Mechanical reclosing lockout after overload or short-circuit

release as standard• The circuit breaker is always equipped with the required num-

ber of auxiliary supply connectors

Standard version

SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with the following features as standard:• Mechanical ON and OFF pushbutton• Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing• Switch position indicator• Ready-to-close indicator• Memory status indicator• Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC• Rear horizontal main circuit connections for fixed-mounted and

withdrawable versions up to 5000 A, and rear vertical main cir-cuit connections for 6300 A applications and size II with 4000 A

• For 4-pole circuit breakers, the fourth pole (N) is installed on the left and is 100 % loadable with the rated current

• Contact erosion indicator for the main contacts• Auxiliary circuit plug-in system with SIGUT screw terminals

Delivery inclusive of all auxiliary circuit connectors to internal features including coding device for the prevention of incor-rect installation of auxiliary supply connectors for fixed-mounted circuit breakers

• Mechanical "tripped" indicator for solid-state release system• Mechanical reclosing lockout after tripping operation• Operator panel cannot be taken off with the circuit breaker in

the ON positionAdditional features of the withdrawable version:• Main contacts:

Laminated receptacles in the guide frame, penetration blades on the withdrawable circuit breaker

• Position indicator in the operator panel of the withdrawable circuit breaker

• Captive manual crank handle for moving the withdrawable circuit breaker

• Guide frame with guide rails for easy moving of the withdraw-able circuit breaker

• The withdrawable circuit breaker can be locked to prevent it being pushed out of position

• The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved when it is in the ON position

• Coding of the rated current between the guide frame and the withdrawable circuit breaker

Standards

SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2• EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2• Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30Versions according to UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.For further specifications, see Appendix.

Horizontal connection

Front connection with single hole or double hole

Vertical connection

Horizontal connection

Front connection with single hole or double hole

Vertical connection

Flange connection

������� ���

������� ���

������� � �

������� �

������� ���

������� ���

������� ���

������� ���

������� ��

Fixed-mounted circuit breakers

Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames

Connection using screw terminals system (SIGUT) (standard)

Screwless connection method (tension springs) (optional)

������� ���

������� ���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/8 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Withdrawable short-circuit, grounding, and bridging units

Portable positively-driven grounding and short-circuit devices are used for the disconnected system sections to verify isolation from the supply at the workplace.

Withdrawable grounding units allow simple and comfortable grounding. They are simply inserted into the guide frames in place of the corresponding withdrawable circuit breakers. This ensures that these devices are always first connected with the grounding electrode and then with the components to be grounded.

The grounding terminals are fitted to the side of the switch enclo-sure and establish the connection when inserted into the guide frame.

All withdrawable terminals are short-circuited and grounded on delivery.

Qualified electricians can easily convert it to a withdrawable bridging unit by following the enclosed instructions.

In addition, the withdrawable unit can be adapted to various rated currents of a size.

Withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit

The withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit consists of a breaker enclosure with penetration blades which are connected with the short-circuiting link.

Depending on the version, the short-circuiting links are arranged at the top or bottom. The grounding and short-circuit connec-tions are established when the device is inserted.

It must be ensured that the side to be short-circuited and grounded is not live. For this reason it is recommended that the withdrawable unit is only wound in when the door is closed.

Withdrawable bridging unit

The withdrawable bridging unit consists of a breaker enclosure in which all disconnection components and the operating mech-anism have been replaced with simple connections between the upper and lower contacts.

Auxiliary releases

Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time. The following are available:

1 shunt release or 1 undervoltage release or 2 shunt releases or 1 shunt release + 1 undervoltage release

Signal switch for auxiliary releases

One signaling contact is used for each auxiliary release to deter-mine the positions of the auxiliary releases.

Shunt releases

When the operational voltage is connected to the shunt release, the circuit breaker is opened immediately. The shunt release is available in the versions 5 % ON period for overexcitation and 100 % ON period for permanent excitation. This means that it is also possible to block the circuit breaker against being jogged into closing.

An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer available.

Undervoltage releases

The undervoltage release causes the circuit breaker to be opened if the operational voltage falls below a certain value or is not applied. The circuit breaker cannot be closed manually or by means of an electrical ON command if the undervoltage release is not connected to the operational voltage. The undervoltage re-lease has no delay as standard. A delay can be set by the cus-tomer in the range between td < 80 ms and td < 200 ms.

In addition, an undervoltage release with a delay in the range from 0.2 to 3.2 s is available.

Closing solenoid

The closing solenoid is used to close the circuit breaker electri-cally by means of a local electrical ON command or by a remote unit.

Motorized operating mechanisms

The operating mechanism is used to load the storage spring au-tomatically.

The operating mechanism is activated if the storage spring has been unloaded and the control voltage is available.

It is switched off automatically after loading. This does not affect manual operation of the storage spring.

Indicators, signals, and control elements

Motor shutdown switch

Control switch for switching off the motorized operating mecha-nism (automatic loading).

Operating cycles counter

The motorized operating mechanism can be supplied with a 5-digit operating cycles counter. The display is incremented by "1" as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded.

Resetting the manual tripped signal

When the circuit breaker has tripped, this is indicated by the pro-truding red mechanical tripped indicator on the ETU. When the mechanical tripped indicator is activated, the tripping solenoid and tripped signal are reset. If this display is to be reset remotely, the reset button can be equipped with a reset solenoid.

This option allows the circuit breaker to be reset both manually and electrically.

Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout

When the ETU is activated, reclosing of the circuit breaker is pre-vented until the release is either electrically or manually reset. If the "Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout" option is used, the pre-tensioned circuit breaker is ready to close immediately after tripping. Resetting the manual tripped indicator is not included in this option.

Tripped signal switch

If the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short-cir-cuit, ground fault or extended protection function, the tripped signal switch can indicate this. This signal switch is available as an option. If the circuit breaker is used for communication, this option is supplied as standard.

Ready-to-close indicator switch

The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with an opti-cal ready-to-close indicator as standard. In addition, the ready-to-close status can be transmitted by means of a signal switch as an option. If the switch is used for communication, the signal switch is supplied as standard.

Short-time current of the grounding terminal

kA 15 (500 ms)

Rated operational voltage V 1000 (690 for size I)

Standards EN 61230

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/9Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

Circuit breakers

Guide frames

� � � � � � � � � �

� � �

� � �

� �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � � �

(1) Arc chute

(2) Carrying handle

(3) Labeling plate

(4) Motor shutdown switch (option) or "Electrical ON" (option)

(5) Name plate for circuit breaker

(6) Memory status indicator

(7) "Mechanical ON" button

(8) Rated current indication

(9) Positioning pictogram

(10) Operating cycles counter (option)

(11) Hand-operated lever

(12) Crank handle

(13) Withdrawable unit drive shaft

(14) Equipment plate

(15) Ground terminal

(16) Position indicator

(17) Table for ground-fault protection

(18) Safety lock for crank handle (option)

(19) Mechanical unlocking of crank handle (option)

(20) Solid-state release

(21) Rated current module

(22) "Mechanical OFF" button or "EMERGENCY-STOP" mushroom pushbutton (option)

(23) Ready-to-close indicator

(24) Switch position indicator

(25) "Tripped" indicator (reset button)

(26) "Secure OFF" locking device (option)

(27) Operator panel

(28) Male connector for auxiliary circuit connections

� � � � � � � � � �

� � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � �

� �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

� �

(1) Arc chute cover (option)

(2) Blow-out openings

(3) Opening for crane hook

(4) Shutter (option)

(5) Locking device (shutter) (option)

(6) Type plate for guide frame

(7) Isolating contacts

(8) Ground terminal Ø 14 mm

(9) Locking device for racking rail

(10) Locking device against movement when control cabinet door is open (option)

(11) Door interlocking for guide frame (option)

(12) Racking rail

(13) Factory-set rated current coding

(14) Sliding contact for breaker grounding (option)

(15) Equipment-dependent coding (option)

(16) Shutter actuator (optional)

(17) Position indicator switch (optional)

(18) Sliding contact module for auxiliary conductors (number depends on equipment)

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/10 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Locking devices

Locking device in OFF position

This function prevents closing of the circuit breaker and com-plies to the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) - disconnector unit. This lockout only affects this cir-cuit breaker.

If the circuit breaker is replaced, closing is no longer prevented unless the new circuit breaker is also protected against unautho-rized closing.

To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.

Locking device for "Electrical ON" (see graphic "Circuit breakers")

This prevents unauthorized electrical closing from the operator panel. Mechanical closing and remote closing remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.

Locking device for "Mechanical ON" (see graphic "Circuit breakers")

This prevents unauthorized mechanical closing. The mechanical ON button can only be activated if the key is inserted (key oper-ation). Closing with the "Electrical ON" button and remote closing remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.

"Secure OFF" circuit breaker-independent locking device against unauthorized closing

This special switch-independent function for withdrawable cir-cuit breakers prevents closing and fulfills the specifications for main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) – disconnector unit. Un-authorized closing remains impossible even after the circuit breaker has been exchanged.

To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.

Locking device for crank handle

Prevents removal of the crank. The circuit breaker is protected against movement. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.

Locking device for "Mechanical OFF"

Prevents unauthorized mechanical opening from the operator panel. The "Mechanical OFF pushbutton" can only be activated if the key is inserted (key operation). Remote opening remains possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.

Locking device for hand-operated lever

The hand-operated lever can be locked with a padlock. The stor-age spring cannot be loaded manually.

Locking device against resetting the "tripped" indicator

A lockable cover prevents manual resetting of the "tripped" indi-cator after overcurrent tripping. This locking device is supplied together with the transparent cover for solid-state releases.

Sealing devices

Sealing cap for "Electrical ON" button

The "Electrical ON button" is equipped with a sealing cap as standard.

Sealing cap for "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" button

The locking set contains covering caps which can be sealed.

Sealing device for solid-state releases

The transparent cover can be sealed. The parameter setting sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access. Openings allow access to the query and test button.

Locking mechanisms

Locking mechanism against movement for withdrawable circuit breakers when the control cabinet door is open

The crank handle is blocked when the control cabinet door is open and cannot be removed. The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved. The lock only affects the inserted crank handle.

Locking of the control cabinet door

The control cabinet door cannot be opened if• The fixed-mounted circuit breaker is closed (the blocking

signal is transmitted via the Bowden wire) or• The withdrawable circuit breaker is in the connected position.

Blocking mechanism using "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons

The "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons are covered with a cap which only allows actuation with a tool. These covering caps are part of the locking set.

Optional equipment for guide frames

Shutters

The sealing strips of the shutter seal the laminated contacts of the guide frame when the withdrawable circuit breaker is re-moved and therefore implement touch protection.

The sealing strips can be manually opened using the strip levers.

The position of the sealing strips can be locked in various posi-tions using padlocks for securing against tampering.

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/11Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame

Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames are equipped with a rated current coding unit as standard.

This ensures that only circuit breakers whose penetration blades are suited to the laminated contacts of the guide frame can be inserted into a guide frame (see diagram below).

Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame

Equipment-dependent coding

Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames can be retrofit-ted with an equipment-dependent coding unit.

This allows different designs of circuit breakers and guide frames to be uniquely assigned. If the circuit breaker and guide frame have been assigned different codes, the circuit breaker cannot be inserted.

36 different coding options can be selected.

Position indicator switch for guide frames

The guide frame can be equipped with position indicator switches. These can be used to determine the position of the cir-cuit breaker in the guide frame.

Two versions are available:• Option 1

Connected position 1 CO contact, test position 1 CO contact, disconnected position 1 CO contact.

• Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts, test position 2 CO contacts, disconnected position 1 CO contact.

Positions of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame

Phase barriers

The plant engineering company can manufacture phase barriers made of insulating material for the arcing fault barriers. The rear panel of the fixed-mounted circuit breakers or guide frames are equipped with guide grooves.

Arc chute cover

The arc chute cover is available as optional equipment for the guide frame. It protects switchgear components which are lo-cated directly above the circuit breaker.

Door sealing frame and cover

SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers have degree of protection IP20 as standard. However, if the switchgear is to be equipped with a higher degree of protection, a door sealing frame with IP41 and a cover with IP55 are available.

� � �

� �

� � �

���������

� � �

� � �

���������

(1) Guide frame, interior of l/h side; interior of r/h side similar

(2) Coding pin on racking rail in guide frame

(3) Racking rail

(4) Withdrawable circuit breaker, r/h side; l/h side similar

(5) Coding pin on guide frame

Display Position indicator Main circuit Auxiliary circuit Control cabinet door

Shutters

Maintenance position Disconnected Disconnected Open Closed

Disconnected position Disconnected Disconnected Closed Closed

Test position Disconnected Connected Closed Closed

Connected position Connected Connected Closed Open

(1) Auxiliary circuit (2) Main circuit (3) Control cabinet door (4) Shutter

� � � � � � � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

�������

����

�����

�����

� � � � � � � � �

� � �

�������

����

�����

�����

� � � � � � � � �

�������

����

�����

�����

� � � � � � � � �

�������

����

�����

�����

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/12 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Function

ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B

Functions of the solid-state releasesBasic protection functions

Overload protection L ✔ ✔ ✔

Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S -- ✔ ✔

Instantaneous short-circuit protection I ✔ ✔ ✔

Neutral conductor protection N -- -- ✔

Ground-fault protection G -- -- ✔

Additional functionsN-conductor protection can be switched on/off -- -- ✔

N-conductor protection adjustable -- -- --

Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --

Non-delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --

Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --

Load monitoring -- -- --

Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t -- -- --

Instantaneous short-circuit protection adjustable ✔ -- --

Overload protection switchable to I4t -- -- --

Overload protection can be switched on/off -- -- --

Selectable parameter sets -- -- --

Parameterization and displayParameterization through rotary coding switches (10 steps) ✔ ✔ ✔

Parameterization through communication (absolute values) -- -- --

Parameterization through user interface of ETU (absolute values) -- -- --

Parameterization of the extended protection functions -- -- --

LCD alphanumerical -- -- --

Graphic LCD -- -- --

Measurement functionMeasurement function Plus -- -- --

CommunicationCubicleBUS -- -- --

Communication through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --

Communication through MODBUS -- -- --

Communication through Ethernet -- -- --

✔ Standard -- Not available ❑ Optional

Detailed information about the functions of the solid-state releases is given in the following.

� � � � � � � � �

NS

E0_

0088

0b

��

� � � � � � � � �

NS

E0_

0088

1b

��

��

� � � � � � � � �

NS

E0_

0088

2b

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/13Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

ETU45B ETU76B

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

❑ ❑

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

-- ✔

-- ✔

✔ --

-- ✔

-- ✔

❑ ❑

❑ --

-- ✔

❑ ❑

✔ ✔

❑ ❑

❑ ❑

❑ ❑

��

��

���

� ��

����

��

���� ��

NS

E0_

0088

3b

=

12

Rating Plug

��

��

���

� ��

����

��

���� ��

NS

E0_

0088

6c

ETU76B

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/14 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Solid-state releases (ETU)

The solid-state release is controlled by a microprocessor and operates independently of an auxiliary voltage. It enables sys-tems to be adapted to the different protection requirements of distribution systems, motors, transformers and generators.

Communication capabilities

The international standard PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS can be used to transmit data such as current values, switching states, reasons for tripping etc. to central computers.

Data acquisition and energy management are possible in con-junction with the Plus measurement function.

A new internal circuit breaker data bus allows switchboard panel communication between the circuit breaker and secondary de-vices in the circuit breaker section:• Actuation of analog displays• Facility to test the communication build-up with circuit

breakers• Display of tripping state and tripping reasons• Input module for reading in further switchgear panel signals

and for transmission of these signals to the PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS

• Various output modules for displaying measured values

This means that it is not only possible to monitor the device re-motely, but also to transmit current values from the entire system and perform switching operations remotely.

I2t and I4t characteristic curve for overload protection

The best protection for the whole switchgear is achieved by set-ting the tripping characteristic curve to an optimum value. In or-der to achieve optimal discrimination for upstream fuses or me-dium voltage protection systems, the inclination of the characteristic curve can be selected for the overload range.

The overload protection L (long time protection) for the solid-state releases ETU45B and ETU76B allows the characteristic curve to be switched between I2t and I4t.

The I4t characteristic improves discrimination for downstream circuit breakers and fuses.

Solid-state releases ETU

Modularity has also been strictly emphasized during the devel-opment of the solid-state releases. These are some of the modules which can be easily retrofitted at any time:• Ground-fault protection module • Communication • Measurement function • Display • Rated current module (Rating Plug)

This allows quick adaptation to new local mains specifications. In addition, innovative functions have been included in the ETUs.

Rated current module/Rating Plug

The rated current module is an exchangeable module which al-lows the user to reduce the rated device current so as to adapt it optimally to the plant; e. g. if a new plant section is taken into operation. The rated current module must be selected to fit the rated current of the plant.

Example of configuration for ETU45B

Measurement function Plus

Selectable parameters

In the case of quick changes of power supply conditions, e. g. for switchovers from transformer to generator operation or if a section of the supply is disconnected when the shift changes, SENTRON 3WL allows the relevant protection param-eters to be quickly adapted to the new conditions. The ETUs contain two independent tripping characteristic curves (parameter sets). The switchover is completed within 200 ms and is performed with the help of an external signal.

Ground-fault protection module (retro-fittable)

Tripped indicator/Reset button

LCD alpha-numericwith 15° inclination and rotatable through 180°

Slide switch for switchable overload characteristic curve

Rated current module/rating plug

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/15Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

ETU15B solid-state release

ETU25B solid-state release

Application:

Simple building and system protection without time-se-lective coordination up to 4000 A. Not to be used for size III.

Features:• Adjustable overload protection

with I2t characteristic curve with preset delay time tR = 10 seconds at 6 × IR

• Instantaneous short-circuit pro-tection adjustable in the range 2 ... 8 × In

• Overload display• Protection function is set by

means of the rotary coding switch

For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".

NS

E0_

0095

4b

Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release

Indicator: fault inovercurrent release

Sealing ring

Test socket

Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout

and mechanicaltripped indicator

Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release

Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release

Indicator: overload alarm

Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated

Application:

Classical building, motor and sys-tem protection with time-selective coordination for up to 6300 A

Features:• Adjustable overload protection

with I2t characteristic curve Delay time tR = 10 seconds at 6 × IR

• Short-time delayed short-circuit protection adjustable in the range 1.25 ... 12 × In and

• Instantaneous short-circuit protection preset to 20 × In, max. 50 kA

• Can be adapted at any time to the required plant currents through retrofittable rated cur-rent module, thus ensuring over-load protection in the range from 100 A to 6300 A

• Overload display• Indicates the reason for tripping

by means of an LED• Test facility for the release• Protection functions are

set by means of the rotary coding switch

For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".

NS

E0_

0095

5b

Rating Plug

ETU25B

Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release

Indicator: fault inovercurrent release

Sealing ring

Test socket

Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout

and mechanicaltripped indicator

Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release

Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release

Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated

Indicator: overload alarm

Query pushbuttonTest pushbutton Clear pushbutton

Indicator: cause of release

Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release

Rated current module

Short-circuit protectionfixed setting

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/16 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

ETU27B solid-state release

ETU45B solid-state release

Application:

Classical building, motor and sys-tem protection with time-selective coordination for up to 6300 A

Features:

The same as ETU25B but also• Reversible neutral conductor

protection• Permanently integrated ground-

fault protection. Calculation of the ground-fault current through vectorial summation current formation

For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".

NS

E0_

0095

6cRating Plug

N

OFF

OFF ON

ETU27B

Rotary switch for delay,earth-fault protection

N-conductor protectionon/off

value, earth-fault protectionRotary switch for setting

Rated current module

Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release

Indicator: fault inovercurrent release

Sealing ring

Test socket

Clear pushbutton

Indicator: cause of release

Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release

Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout

and mechanicaltripped indicator

Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release

Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release

Indicator: overcurrentrelease activated

Indicator: overload alarm

Query pushbuttonTest pushbutton

Short-circuit protectionfixed setting

Application:

Low-cost all-round system for intelligent buildings and all types of industrial applica-tions – "CubicleBUS integrated"

Features:

The same as ETU25B but also• Adjustable time-lag class

for overload protection• Selectable characteristic for overload and

short-delayed short-circuit range (current discrimination) for more accurate discrimi-nation adaptation to upstream fuses and protective devices

• Thermal image as restart protection for tripped motor outgoing feeders

• Reversible and adjustable neutral conduc-tor protection

• Modular ground-fault protection module with alarm and tripping functions which can be adjusted separately

• Communication interface, measurement function Plus, optional con-nection of external modules or for retrofitting

• Storage of events and causes for tripping for detailed fault analysis

• Extended protection function possible with measurement function

• Optional high-contrast display with viewing angle adjustment option

• The protection functions can be set by means of a rotary coding switch or slide switch

For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" "Technical specifications".

=

12

g

NSE0_00957b

Rating Plug

OFF ON

11111

SI

ETU45B

t / t42

t / t2g g

Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release

Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout

and mechanicaltripped indicator

Indicator: fault inovercurrent release

Sealing ring

Test socket

Rotary switch for settingvalue, overload release

Rotary switch for settingvalue, instantaneousshort-circuit release

Overload alarm

Overcurrent releaseactivated

Clear pushbutton

Indicator: cause of release

Rotary switch for delay,short-circuit release

Rated current module

Selector forearth-fault protection

Rotary switch for delay,earth-fault protection

N-conductor protection on/off

Scroll up

COMMUNICATIONEXPANDED

Indicators:

Rotary switch for settingvalue, short-circuit

protection

Rotary switch for settingvalue, earth-fault

protectionRotary switch for settingvalue, earth-fault alarm

Test pushbuttonQuery pushbutton

Option: alphanumeric display

Scroll down

Thermal memory on/off

Setting valueN-conductor overload

Indicator: earth-fault tripped

Indicator: earth-fault alarmOption: earth-fault module

Rotary switch for delay,overload release

Transfer of overloadcharacteristic

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/17Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

ETU76B solid-state release

Ground-fault protection Ground-fault releases "G" sense fault currents that flow to ground and that can cause fire in the plant. Multiple circuit breakers con-nected in series can have their delay times adjusted so as to pro-vide graduated discrimination.

When setting the parameters for the solid-state release it is pos-sible to choose between "alarm" and "trip" in the event that the set current value is exceeded. The reason for tripping is indi-cated by means of an LED when the query button is activated.

The ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release versions can be retrofitted with a ground-fault protection module. This ground fault protection function is integrated in ETU27B solid-state re-leases.

Application:

The multi-talent with graphical display for system analysis –"CubicleBUS integrated"

Features:

The same as ETU45B but also including• Two protection parameter sets

which can be stored separately in the release (switchover is per-formed by means of external sig-nal)

• With overload protection which can be deactivated for operation in modern drive technology

• Adjustable delay of delayed short-circuit protection up to 4000 ms

• Neutral conductor protection ad-justable up to IN = 200 % In

• Setting of protection functions by means of Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) or via communications in-terface

• Graphical display of all parameters and events/ curve trends

• Graphics display with high con-trast, backlit display, and sleep mode

For technical details see the table "Functional overview of the solid-state release system" under "Technical specifications".

Rating Plug

NSE0_00960b

ETU76B

Option: safety lockprevents pressing ofreset button afterovercurrent release

Mechanical RESETfor reclosing lockout

and mechanicaltripped indicator

Overload alarm

Overcurrent releaseactivated

COMMUNICATIONEXPANDED

Indicators:

Query pushbutton

Test pushbutton

Fields for notingsetting values

Indicator: fault inovercurrent release

Test socket

Clear pushbutton

Ground-fault tripped

Indicators:

Fields for notingsetting values

Ground-fault alarm

Control keys for settinghe release parameters

Indicator: cause of release

Rated current module

Graphical display

Option: earth-fault module

GFM AT 45B ground-fault module

GFM AT 55B-76B ground-fault module

ALARM ALARM

.5

.4

.3

.2

.1

.1

.2

.3

.4

.5

� g (s) �

2� g

NSE0_00962a

GFM AT 45B

TRIP

G ABCDEOFF

TRIPg

Selector forground-fault

detection

Rotary switchfor setting valueground-fault alarm

Ground-faultalarm

Rotary switchfor setting

value, ground-fault protection delay

� g/� � g

Rotary switchfor setting

value,ground-fault

protection

Ground-faulttripped

Indicators:

2

ALARM ALARM

NSE0_00964a

GFM AT 55B-76B

TRIPTRIP

g

A

A

ms

2�

g�

g� g�

=

= =

Field fornoting

transferground-fault

detection

Fields fornoting setting

values

Ground-faultalarm

Fields fornoting settingvalues

Ground-faulttripped

Indicators:

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/18 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Measurement method

Vectorial summation current formation (measurement method 1)

The three phase currents and the N conductor current are mea-sured directly.

The solid-state release determines the ground-fault current by means of vectorial summation current formation for the three phase currents and the N conductor current.

Direct measurement of the ground-fault current (measurement method 2)

A standard current transformer with the following data is used for measurement of the ground-fault current: 1200 A/1 A, Class 1 (the internal load of SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 �). The current trans-former can be installed directly in the grounded neutral point of a transformer.

3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the N conductor

3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer

4-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral point of the transformer

Setting

How the module is set depends on the measurement method used (see above):

Measurement method 1: in position .

Measurement method 2: in position .

This setting can be implemented for the solid-state release ver-sion ETU76B with Menu/Comm.

Ground-fault protection with I2t characteristic curve

With the exception of the ETU27B solid-state release, all versions of the ground-fault modules are supplied with an I2t characteristic curve which can be activated.

Selection criteria for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers

Basic criteria for selecting circuit breakers are:• Max. short-circuit current at place of installation of circuit

breaker I �k max. This value determines the short-circuit breaking capacity or short-circuit current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker.

• It is compared with the value Icu, Ics, Icw of the circuit breaker and essentially determines the size of the circuit breaker. See illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".

• Rated current In which is to flow through the branch circuit. This value must not be larger than the maximum rated current for the circuit breaker.The rated current for the SENTRON 3WL is set with the rated current module. See "Design", illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".

• Ambient temperature for the circuit breaker. This is usually the control cabinet internal temperature.

• Design of the circuit breaker• Minimum short-circuit current

which flows through the switching device. The release must still detect this value as a short-circuit and must respond by tripping.

Protection functions of the circuit breaker. These are determined by the selection of the corresponding solid-state release, see the table "Functions of the solid-state releases" under "Functions".

������

��

��

��

��

���������

������

��

��

��

��

���������

T6: 1200 A/1 A

������

��

��

��

���

���������

T6: 1200 A/1 A

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/19Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

SENTRON 3WL for DC applications

This version of the 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker is suit-able for direct current applications. The external protective de-vice DIGmat S100 provides adjustable overload and short-circuit protection for the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker.

This is based on the measuring chain of a shunt resistor and the DIGmat S100 tripping unit. Shunt resistors are available for 1000 A, 2000 A and 4000 A (special ranges on request). They are in accordance with DIN 43703 and have a class accuracy of 0.5.

A measuring-circuit voltage of 60 mV DC is picked off for rated current In.

The measuring-circuit voltage is a linear image of the primary current.

The DIGmat S100 tripping unit monitors the image of the primary current thus supplied and compares it with the tripping charac-teristic curve set on the device. The parameter settings on the DIGmat S100 apply also for DC feedbacks. Reversing duty is possible therefore.

The tripping characteristic curve is determined and described by the following variables:• Overload protection:

Setting range IR = 0.4 ... 1.0 InThe curve has a I2t characteristic.The tripping time tR is selectable between 2 and 10 s, with tR defined for 6 × IR.

DIGmat S100

• Short-circuit protection:Setting range Ii = 1.25 × IR up to max. 4 × In If the set value is exceeded, tripping occurs in less than 50 ms.

In = Rated current of the circuit breakerIR = Set current value of the adjustable overload releasetR = Assigned tripping time of the overload tripIi = Instantaneous tripping current of the adjustable short-

circuit releases

The components are available only from the company mat – Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix" => "External Partners").

■ Configuration

Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking

The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for one or two SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers and can be adapted easily to the corresponding versions. The fixed-mounted and withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and can therefore be used in a mixed configuration in an installation. This also applies to 3WN6 circuit breakers.

The circuit breakers can be mounted alongside each other or one above the other, whereby the distance of the circuit breakers is determined solely by the length of the Bowden wire (lengths: 2 m/3 m/4.5 m). Interlock signals are looped through using the Bowden wires. Interlocking is only effective in the connected po-sition in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers. The mechan-ical endurance of the Bowden cables is 10 000 operating cycles.

Minimum requirements must be fulfilled in the switchgear for the interlocking to function:• Bowden wires must be installed as far as possible in a straight

line with minimum bending.

• The bending radii of the Bowden wire must be greater than 500 mm.

• The sum of all bending angles along the Bowden wire must not exceed 640°.

• In a vertical arrangement of circuit breakers to be interlocked, the interlocking mechanisms must be in line.

• Circuit breakers to be interlocked must be arranged so that Bowden cables can be optimally installed in compliance with the conditions mentioned in the above points.

• The installed Bowden wire must be fixed (with cable ties or the like) before the interlock is adjusted.

• Select the width of switchgear cubicle to allow enough free-dom of movement for adjusting the interlock!

• Openings and cut-outs in system elements must be designed so that Bowden wires are not changed in direction or ob-structed when they are passed through.

Mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers – examples

Mutual interlocking of two circuit breakers

Interlocking between three circuit breakers

Mutual interlocking of three circuit breakers

Interlocking of three circuit breakers, two of them mutual

�����

�� ��

�����

�� ��

��

�����

�� �� ��

�����

�� �� ��

�� ��

��

����

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/20 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Communication-capable circuit breakers

Communication with PROFIBUS DP

Communication with MODBUS

The requirements for power distribution in terms of communica-tion capability, data transparency, flexibility and integration are constantly increasing. An integrated and modular communica-tion architecture was designed for the SENTRON 3WL to ensure that it can satisfy these requirements.

The core component of this architecture is the CubicleBUS, which links together all of the intelligent components within the SENTRON 3WL and enables the easy and safe connection of other additional external components to the circuit breaker. The CubicleBUS is already incorporated and pre-connected in all complete circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases.

The high level of modularity of the system allows communication functions to be retrofitted at any time (e. g. the measurement function). Similarly, the upgrade of a non-communication-capa-ble SENTRON 3WL (e .g. changeover from ETU25B to ETU45B with CubicleBUS) can be carried out easily on site in the plant. All modules connected to the CubicleBUS can directly access the existing source data of the circuit breaker, which guarantees the quickest possible access to information and response to events.

Furthermore, additional external modules (including digital in-puts/outputs, analog outputs) can be connected to the CubicleBUS to provide cost-effective solutions for the automa-tion of further devices in the switchgear.

NS

E0_

0182

0a

Ethernet/Intranet/Internet

PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7data acquisition andprocessing

PC with Switch ES PowerSENTRON 3WL/3VL parameterization

and visualization tool throughPROFIBUS DP

Output devicee.g. notebookwith browser

BDABDA Plus

Measurement- function Plus

COM15

BSSETU

Zon

e S

elec

tive

Inte

rlock

ing

mod

ule

Dig

ital o

utpu

t mod

ule

Rel

ay

Dig

ital o

utpu

t mod

ule

Rel

ay, c

onfig

urab

le

Ana

log

outp

ut m

odul

e

Dig

ital i

nput

mod

ule

NS

E0_

0189

4

Ethernet/Intranet/Internet

MODBUS MasterPLC or monitoring software

Configuration anddisplay software

Output devicee.g. notebookwith browser

BDABDAPlus

Measurement function Plus

COM16

BSSETU

MODBUS

Zone

Sel

ectiv

e In

terlo

ckin

g m

odul

e

Dig

ital o

utpu

t mod

ule

Rel

ay

Dig

ital o

utpu

t mod

ule

Rel

ay, c

onfig

urab

le

Ana

log

outp

ut m

odul

e

Dig

ital i

nput

mod

ule

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/21Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

SENTRON 3WL communication-capable circuit breakers

Function Solid-state release version

Breaker Status Sensor

PROFI-BUS com-munica-tion port

Mea-sure-ment func-tion Plus

Analog output mod-ules

Digital output mod-ules

Digital input mod-ules

ZSI mod-ules

Breaker Data Adapter

Breaker Data Adapter Plus

ETU45B ETU76B

Functions of the communication-capable SENTRON 3WL circuit breakersIndication of measured values in release (current only) ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Indication of measured values in release (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Indication of measured values (current only), parameter, diagnostic values etc. on display -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Indication of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.), parameters, diagnostic values etc. in release -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Output of measured values (current only) to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Output of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Output of digital signals (e. g. reason for tripping, alarm signals, status) through contacts

✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Automatic changeover between parameter sets A and B -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏

Read in digital signals and forward to PROFIBUS/MODBUS ✓ ✓ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏

Transmission of switch information on HTML basis locally to a PC ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ✓

Transmission of switch information on HTML basis through Ethernet ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓

Short-time grading control for S tripping and G protection ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏

Local display of harmonic analysis and waveform memory -- ✓ ❏ ❏ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Local storage of harmonic analysis and waveform memory and transmission through PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Read out protection parameters through PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

Read out and adjust protection parameters through PROFIBUS -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏

✓ Required

Function can optionally be taken over by more than one release.

Function can optionally be taken over by one of these modules.

❏ Not necessary for this function, optionally combinable

-- Function not available

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/22 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Data that can be transmitted over the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS or the Breaker Data Adapter

1) Data only available in conjunction with the COM15 module (BUS connec-tion not required).

2) Only possible with ETU76B.

✔ Available

-- Not available

All SENTRON 3WLs with ETU45B, ETU76B (CubicleBUS integrated)

Transmittable circuit breaker dataBSS BDA BSS COM15/COM16

Order code (Order No. of circuit breaker + "–Z")

Order No.

F01+"BDA/BDAPLUS" Order No.

F02/F12

Potential applicationsTransmission of circuit breaker data to PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS and integration into higher-level visualization systems are possible e. g. in PCS7, Power Management Systems, WinCC (incl. add-ons like the text message radio server)

-- ✔

Transmission of circuit breaker data and software (i. e. HTML pages with data) to a local output device, or remotely through Ethernet/Intranet/Internet (without the possibility of integration into higher-level visualization systems) e. g. for monitoring, diagnostics, maintenance and parameterization of individual circuit breakers

✔ --

Utilization of the functionality of all CubicleBUS modules e. g. configuration of the configurable digital output module, status check of the digital input modules, diagnostics

✔ ✔

Transmittable circuit breaker data without integrated measurement functionDevice identification Communication address, Order No., circuit breaker in delivery status, circuit breaker parameters(size, number of poles, rated current module etc.), identification numbers, release type, Free text for plant code and comments

--1)

Operating statuses On/off status message, storage spring, tripped, readinessSwitching position (connected, test and disconnected position, removed) for withdrawable circuit breakers, PROFIBUS/MODBUS write protection on/off, free user input

✔ --1)

--1)

✔✔✔

Control commands Switch circuit breaker on/off, switch free user output on/offReset tripped signalDelete event and history memoryReset the min./max. measured values, reset the maintenance information

--1)

✔ --1)

✔✔✔✔

History Read out the event protocol, read out the release protocol --1) ✔

Maintenance information Number of tripping operations L, S/I and in total, contact wearNumber of operating cycles under load and in total, number of operating hours

✔ --1)

✔✔

Event signals Tripped signal with details of the tripping currentAlarm signals (e. g. overload) with incoming/outgoing informationAll of the named event signals with time stamp

✔--1)

--1)

✔✔✔

Parameterization of the protection functions Reading out of the protection function parametersSettings for the protection function parameters can be changed by means of communicationParameter set switchover possible (set A to set B and back)

✔ ✔2)

✔ 2)

✔ ✔ 2)

✔ 2)

Measured values Phase currents, each with min./max. valueTemperature in the circuit breaker with min./max. valueTemperature in the control cabinet with min./max. valueAll of the named measured values with time stamp

✔--1)

--1)

--1)

✔✔✔✔

Measurement function Plus

Order code F01+ ... or F02+ ... F05Additional transmittable circuit breaker data with integrated measurement functionAdditional event signals Threshold value alarms (e. g. over/underfrequency, over/undervoltage) ✔

Parameterization of the extended protection functions and setpoints (threshold values) Reading out the parameters of the extended protection functionsSettings for the extended protection function parameters can be changedReading out and adjusting threshold values

✔✔✔

Additional measured values Voltages, power, energy, power factor, frequency, each with min./max. valueHarmonic analysisRecording of currents and voltages for configurable events in the curve form memory

✔✔✔

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/23Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

CubicleBUS modules

Digital output modules with rotary coding switch

6 items of binary information concerning the state of the circuit breaker (reasons for tripping and warnings) can be output via this module to external signaling devices (e. g. LED, horn) or be used for the selective shut-down of other system components (e. g. frequency converters).

Digital output modules are available in versions with and without a rotary coding switch. On modules with a rotary coding switch it is possible to choose between two signaling blocks each with 6 defined assignments and to set an additional response delay.

All the digital output modules are available as a version with re-lay outputs (CO contacts, up to 12 A). Up to two modules of this type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.

Digital output module with rotary coding switch

Digital output modules, configurable

The configurable output module is available for higher-perfor-mance solutions. With this module, random events on the CubicleBUS can be switched directly to one of six available out-puts or three of these outputs can be assigned with up to six events. In other words, up to six events can be placed on one physical output with OR operation. Either BDA/BDA Plus or Switch ES Power is used for configuring.

A relay variant is also available here the same as for the output modules with rotary coding switch. Only one module of this type is possible per SENTRON 3WL.

Digital output module, configurable

Analog output modules

The analog output module can be used to output the following measured values to analog indicators in the control cabinet door:• IL1, IL2, IL3, IN or• UL12, UL23, UL31, UL1N or• PL1, PL2, PL3, Stot or• p.f.1 , p.f.2 , p.f.3, �I % or• favg, ULLavg, Ptot, p.f.avg

Four 4-20-mA/0-10-V interfaces are available for this. The mea-sured values to be output are selected with a rotary coding switch. By using the analog output module it is possible to do without additional converters and their conventional installa-tion/wiring in the main current path. Up to two modules of this type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.

Analog output module

Digital input modules

With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals (24 V DC) in the circuit breaker environment can be connected to the system. It is thus possible for example to send messages concerning the state of a switch disconnector or a control cabi-net door to the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS.

With the digital input module on the CubicleBUS it is also possi-ble for the two different protection parameter sets held in the ETU76B solid-state releases to be switched over automatically in a few milliseconds. It is thus possible, for example, to automati-cally change the parameters of a coupling switch should the transformer infeed fail.

One module each of this type can be used for holding the six items of digital information and for automatically switching over the parameters.

Digital input module

ZSI modules (short-time grading control)

The use of ZSI modules is recommended when Siemens circuit breakers are arranged in several staggered levels but full grad-ing with the smallest possible delay is to be assured nevertheless.

The circuit breakers are interconnected by these modules. In case of a short-circuit, each affected circuit breaker asks the cir-cuit breakers directly downstream whether the short-circuit has also occurred in the next, lower level. The short-circuit is exactly localized as the result, and only the next upstream circuit breaker in the energy flow direction is switched off.

ZSI module (short-time grading control)

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/24 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Technical specifications

1) Size II with In max � 2500 A.2) Size II with In max = 3200 A and In max = 4000 A.3) At a rated voltage of 690 V the Icw value of the circuit breaker cannot be

greater than the Icu or Ics value at 690 V.4) Rated operational voltage Ue = 1150 V.

Size I II III

Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13

Switching capacity class N

S

N

S

H

H

C3-pole

C4-pole

Short-circuit breaking capacityRated operational voltage Ue up to 415 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 500 V AC

Icu kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Ics kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130

Icm kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 690 V AC

Icu kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Ics kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130

Icm kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286

Rated operational voltage Ue up to 1000 V/1150 V AC

Icu kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)

Ics kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 704) 704)

Icm kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 1544) 1544)

Rated short-time withstand current Icw of the circuit breakers3)

0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100

2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 651)/702) 80 80 80

3 s kA 24 29 32 37 501)/652) 65 65 65Short-circuit breaking capacity Icc of the non-automatic air circuit breakersUp to 500 V AC kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100

Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100

N S N S H H C C

Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N (Icu = Ics up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S (Icu = Ics up to 66 kA size I/up to 80 kA size II at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H (Icu = Ics up to 100 kA at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C (Icu = Ics up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole) at 500 V)

Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity

These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical specifications by orange-colored backgrounds.

N

S

H

C

DC

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/25Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with ETU15B = 85 ms.

2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.

3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).

4) Use of releases from –20 °C.5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.

Size I IIType ... 3WL11 10 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 HzMain conductorN conductor (only on 4-pole versions)

AA

... 1000

... 100012501250

16001600

800800

10001000

12501250

16001600

20002000

Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")

V AC ... 690 ... 690 ... 690 ... 690/1000

... 690/1000

... 690/1000

... 690/1000

... 690/1000

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits

kVkVkV

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes YesUtilization categories BPermissible ambient temperature• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4)

• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed)

°C°C

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections

• Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5)

• Up to 70 °C (Cu blackpainted)5)

AAA

100010001000

125012501210

160016001490

800800800

100010001000

125012501250

160016001600

200020002000

Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000Power loss at InWith 3-phase symmetrical load• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers

WW

100195

105205

150350

4085

4595

80165

85175

180320

Operating times• Make-time• Opening time• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)2)

• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)• Electrical opening time (instant. undervoltage release)• Opening time due to ETU, instant. short-circuit release

msmsmsmsmsms

3538807373501)

3538807373501)

3538807373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

Endurance• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1150 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles

10 00020 00010 000----20 000

10 00020 00010 000----20 000

10 00020 00010 000----20 000

10 00015 000

75001000

50015 000

10 00015 000

75001000

50015 000

10 00015 000

75001000

50015 000

10 00015 00075001000

50015 000

10 00015 000

75001000

50015 000

Switching frequency • 690 V version • 1000 V version• 1150 V version

1/h1/h1/h

60----

60----

60----

602020

602020

602020

602020

602020

Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only with autom. mechanical resetting of the lockout device)

ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

Mounting position

and/ or

Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with coverMain conductor minimum cross-sections

• Copper bars, bare

• Copper bars, painted black

Unitsmm2

Unitsmm2

1 × 60 × 101 × 60 × 10

2 × 40 × 102 × 40 × 10

2 × 50 × 102 × 50 × 10

1 × 50 × 101 × 50 × 10

1 × 60 × 101 × 60 × 10

2 × 40 × 102 × 40 × 10

2 × 50 × 102 × 50 × 10

3 × 50 × 103 × 50 × 10

Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors ×cross-section (solid/stranded)

Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to

DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to

DIN 46228 Part 2

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

Position indicator switches Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)Weights 3-pole

4-pole

• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers

• Withdrawable circuit breakers

• Guide frames• Fixed-mounted circuit

breakers• Withdrawable circuit

breakers• Guide frames

kg

kg

kgkg

kg

kg

43

45

2550

54

30

43

45

2550

54

30

43

45

2550

54

30

56

60

3167

72

37

56

60

3167

72

37

56

60

3167

72

37

56

60

3167

72

37

56

60

3167

72

37

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � �

������

���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/26 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

1) Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with ETU15B = 85 ms.

2) Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.

3) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).

4) Use of releases from –20 °C.5) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 °C.6) 4000 A, size II in fixed-mounted version, 3-pole. 7) Size III: data for very high switching capacity.8) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit

breakers: 4 x 120 x 10 mm.

Size II III

Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63

Rated current In at 40 °C, at 50/60 HzMain conductorN conductor (only on 4-pole versions)

AA

25002500

32003200

40004000

40004000

50005000

63006300

Rated operational voltage Ue at 50/60 Hz(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")

V AC ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000

Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits

kVkVkV

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Utilization categories B (except switching capacity class DC)

Permissible ambient temperature• During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 °C)4)

• During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed)°C°C

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

–25/+70–40/+70

Permissible load6) • Up to 55 °C (Cu bare)• Up to 60 °C (Cu bare)5)

• Up to 70 °C (Cu black painted)5)

AAA

250025002280

320030202870

395038103600

400040004000

500050005000

592058105500

Rated rotor operational voltage Uer V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

Power loss at InWith 3-phase symmetrical load• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers

WW

270520

410710

750925

520810

6301050

9001600

Operating times• Make-time• Opening time• Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)2)

• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)• Opening time due to ETU, instantaneous short-circuit release

msmsmsmsmsms

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

1007373501)

3534

100737350

3534

100737350

3534

100737350

Endurance• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1150 V version, electrical7) (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)3) Oper. cycles

1000015000

75001000

50015000

1000015000

40001000

50015000

1000015000

40001000

50015000

500010000

20001000

100010000

500010000

20001000

100010000

500010000

20001000

100010000

Switching frequency• 690 V version• 1000 V version• 1150 V version7)

1/h1/h1/h

602020

602020

602020

602020

602020

602020

Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only with automatical mechanical resetting of the lockout device)

ms 80 80 80 80 80 80

Mounting position

Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover

Main conductor minimum cross-sections

• Copper bars, bare

• Copper bars, painted black

Unitsmm2

Unitsmm2

2 × 100 × 102 × 100 × 10

3 × 100 × 103 × 100 × 10

4 × 120 × 104 × 100 × 108)

4 x 100 x 104 × 100 × 10

6 x 100 x 106 × 100 × 10

6 x 120 x 106 × 120 × 10

Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors × cross-section (solid/stranded)

Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

Position indicator switches

Tension spring terminals 1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)

Weights 3-pole

4-pole

• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames

kgkgkgkgkgkg

596339717647

646845778254

85121 52103146 62

82886099

10684

82886099

10684

909670

108108119

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

and/ or

� � � � � � � � �

������

���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/27Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

1) 24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR (F3).

Size I to III

Type 3WL1

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing

Closing/Charging stored-energy feature

Max. force required to operate the hand leverRequired number of strokes on the hand lever

N � 2309

Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing

Charging stored-energy feature

Closing solenoid (CC)

• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC

0.7 ... 1.26 × Us

• Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15

• Minimum command duration at Us for the closing solenoid ms 60

• Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

1 A TDz (slow)/1 A

Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing

Manual operating mechanism

For data see above.

Motor • Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC

0.7 ... 1.26 × Us

• Power consumption of motor AC/DC VA/W 135/135

• Time required to charge the stored-energy mechanism at 1 × Us s � 10

Closing solenoid For data see above.

For motor and closing solenoid

• Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic; Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages

2 A TDz (slow)/1 A

• Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (for different rated control supply voltages)

At Us = 24 ... 30 VAt Us = 48 ... 60 VAt Us = 110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V ACAt Us = 220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC

2 A2 A1 A

1 A

Solid-state release signalsMeasuring accuracy of the solid-state release Protection functions according to

EN 60947; current indication � 10 %;Measurement functionbase quantities � 1 %;Measurement functionderived quantities � 4 %

Auxiliary releasesUndervoltage releases UVR (F3) and UVR-td (F4)

• Response values Pickup

Dropout

� 0.85 × Us (circuit breaker can be closed)0.35 ... 0.7× Us (circuit breaker is tripped)

• Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1

• Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 30 V DC, 48 V DC, 110 V DC, 220 V DC

0.85 ... 1.26

• Rated control supply voltage Us Instantaneous AC 50/60 HzDC

Delayed AC 50/60 HzDC

VV

VV

110 ... 127/208 ... 240/380 ... 41524/30/48/60/110/220 ... 2501)

110 ... 127; 208 ... 240; 380 ... 41548; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250

• Power consumption (pickup/uninterrupted duty) ACDC

VAW

20/520/5

• Opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 0 ms 200- Version UVR (F3)

InstantaneousWith delay

msms

80 200

- Version UVR-td (F8)With delay, td = 0.2 to 3.2 sReset through additional NC contact – direct switching off

sms

0.2 ... 3.2 � 100

• Short-circuit protectionSmallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

1 A TDz (slow) 1 A

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/28 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size I to III

Type 3WL1

Auxiliary releasesShunt release (ST)(F1, F2)

• For continuous command (100 % ON period), locks out on momentary-con-tact commands

- Response value pickup > 0.7 × Us (circuit breaker is tripped)

- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

- Extended operating range for battery operation

At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC

0.7 ... 1.26 × Us

- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC

VV

110; 23024; 30; 48; 60; 110; 220

- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15

- Minimum command duration at Us ms 60

- opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 100 %

AC/DC ms 80

- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operationalclass)/ miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

1 A TDz (slow)/1 A

5 % ON period - Response value Pickup > 0.7 × Us (circuit breaker is tripped)

- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

- Extended operating range for battery operation

At 24 V DC, 48 V DC60 V DC, 110 V DC220 V DC

0.7 ... 1.26 × Us

- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC

VV

110 ... 127; 208 ... 24024; 48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250

- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15

- Minimum command duration at Us ms 25

- Opening time of circuit breaker at Us = 100 %

AC/DC ms 50

- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

1 A TDz (slow)/1 A

• With stored energy feature consisting of shunt release and capac-itor storage device

- Rated control supply voltage Us AC 50/60 HzDC

VV

110; 230110; 220

- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 1/1

- Storage time at Us/recharging time at Us

maximum 5 min/minimum 5 s

- Opening time of circuit breaker, short-circuit protection

As with "for continuous command"

Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indicator (F7)Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indica-tor (F7)

- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 × Us

- Extended operating range for battery operation

At 24 V DC, 48 V DC110 V DC220 V DC

0.7 ... 1.26 × Us

- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 50/50

- Minimum command duration at Us for the remote reset solenoid

ms 60

- Short-circuit protection Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

2 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 24 V DC and 48 V DC, 1 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 110 V and 208 ... 250 V

Contact position-driven auxiliary switches (S1, S2, S3, S4, S7, S8)Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC/DC 500

Rated operational voltage Ue V AC/DC 500

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4

Switching capacity • Alternating current 50/60 Hz

- Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current

Ie /AC-12 Ie/AC-15

V

AA

24 ... 230

104

380/400

103

500

102

• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current

Ie/DC-12 Ie/DC-13

V

AA

24

10 8

48

8 4

110

3.5 1.2

220

1 0.4

Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) • Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

10 A TDz, 10 A Dz10 A

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/29Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

Size I to III

Type 3WL1

Ready-to-close signaling switch (S20) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue

- Rated operational current IeVA

2508

• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current Ie

VA

1250.4

2500.2

Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 2 A Dz (quick)

Tripped signal switch (S24) and signal switch for auxiliary releases (S22, S23) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)Switching capacity • Alternating current - Rated operational voltage Ue

- Rated operational current Ie/AC-12VA

2508

• Direct current - Rated operational voltage Ue- Rated operational current Ie/DC-12

VA

246

1250.4

2500.2

Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 6 A Dz (quick)

Tripped signal switch Signal duration after tripping Until manual or electrical remote reset (option)

Position indicator switch on guide frameType of contact • Signal: - "Circuit breaker in connected

position"- "Circuit breaker in test position"- "Circuit breaker in disconnected

position"

3 CO2 CO1 CO

or1 CO1 CO1 CO

Rated insulation voltage Ui AC 50/60 HzDC

VV

440250

Rated operational voltage Ue V 250

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4

Switching capacity • Rated operational current Ie

- Ie/AC-12

- Ie/AC-15

- Ie/DC-12

- Ie/DC-13

- A 300 (AC)

- R 300 (DC)

24 V 10 A, 110/127 V 10 A, 220/240 V 10 A, 320/440 V 10 A220/240 V 4 A, 320/440 V 3 A,24 V 10 A, 48 V 2.5 A,220/240 V 0.2 A,24 V 3.0 A, 220/240 V 0.1 A

120 V 6 A, 240 V 3 A

125 V 0.22 A, 250 V 0.11 A

Short-circuit protection • Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)• Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic

8 A TDz (slow)8 A TDz (slow)

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15/30 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

For the setting range of the operating current Ig see page 15/31.

Protection functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27BParameterization by D D D & SFunctional overview of the solid-state release system

L

Overload protectionFunction can be switched on/off

✓--

✓--

✓--

Setting range IR = In × ... 0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-1

0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1

0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1

Switchable overload protection (I2t- or I4t-dependent function)

-- -- --

Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixedSetting range for time-lag class tR at I4t -- -- --Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --Phase failure sensitivity -- at tsd = 20 ms (M) at tsd = 20 ms (M)

NNeutral conductor protection -- -- ✓

Function can be switched on/off -- -- ✓ N conductor setting range IN = In × ... -- -- 1

S

Short-time delayed short-circuit protection -- ✓ ✓

Function can be switched on/off -- -- --Setting range Isd = In × ... -- 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12Setting range for delay time tsd -- 0-M-100-200-300-400 ms 0-M-100-200-300-400 msSwitchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection (I2t-dependent function)

-- -- --

Setting range for delay time tsd at I2t -- -- --Zone Selective Interlocking function -- -- --

IInstantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓ ✓

Function can be switched on/off -- -- --Setting range Ii = In × ... 2-3-4-5-6-7-8 Fixed for Ii � 20 × In, max. 50 kA Fixed for Ii � 20 × In, max. 50 kA

G

Ground-fault protection -- -- ✓ Fixed mountedTripping and alarm function -- -- --Tripping function can be switched on/off -- -- ✓ Alarm function can be switched on/off -- -- --Detection of the ground-fault current through summation current formation with internal or external neutral con-ductor transformer

-- -- ✓

Detection of ground-fault current through external current transformer

-- -- --

Setting range of the operating current Ig for release -- -- A-B-C-D-ESetting range of the operating current Ig for alarm -- -- --Setting range of the delay time tg -- -- 100-200-300-400-500 msSwitchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve (I2t-dependent function)

-- -- --

Setting range for delay time tg at I2t -- -- --

Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. func. -- -- --Parameter set switchover

Switchable between parameter set A and B -- -- --LCD

Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) -- -- --Graphical LCD (24 V, ext. power supply required) -- -- --

CommunicationCubicleBUS integrated -- -- --Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --

Measurement functionMeasurement-function capable with measurement function Plus

-- -- --

LED displaySolid-state release active ✓ ✓ ✓

Alarm ✓ ✓ ✓

ETU fault ✓ ✓ ✓

L-release -- ✓ ✓

S-release -- ✓ ✓

I-release -- ✓ ✓

N-release -- -- ✓

G-release -- -- ✓

G-alarm -- -- --Release through extended protection function -- -- --Communication -- -- --

Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)Overload warning -- -- --Load shedding, load receiving -- -- --Leading signal overload trip 200 ms -- -- --Temperature alarm -- -- --Phase unbalance -- -- --Instantaneous short-circuit release -- -- --Short-time delayed short-circuit release -- -- --Overload trip -- -- --Neutral conductor release -- -- --Ground-fault protection release -- -- --Ground-fault alarm -- -- --Auxiliary relay -- -- --ETU fault -- -- --

� � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� � � � � � � � �

��������

��������

Delay time figures given in ms. ✓ AvailableM = Motor protection, corresponds to 20 ms. -- Not availableD = Rotary coding switch ❑ OptionalD & S = Rotary coding and slide switchK = CommunicationM/K = Menu/communication

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/31Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

General data

15

Protection functions ETU45B ETU76BParameterization by D & S M/KFunctional overview of the solid-state release systemOverload protectionFunction can be switched on/off

✓--

✓✓

Setting range IR = In × ... 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6- 0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1

0.4 ... 1

Switchable overload protection (I2t- or I4t-dependent function)

✓ ✓

Setting range for time-lag class tR at I2t 2-3.5-5.5-8-10-14-17-21-25-30 s 2 ... 30 sSetting range for time-lag class tR at I4t 1-2-3-4-5 s 1 ... 5 sThermal image can be switched on/off ✓ ✓

Phase failure sensitivity At tsd = 20 ms (M) ✓ (on/off)Neutral conductor protection ✓ ✓

Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ N conductor setting range IN = In × ... 0.5 ... 1 0.2 ... 2Short-time delayed short-circuit protection ✓ ✓

Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Setting range Isd = In × ... 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25 × In ... 0.8 × IcwSetting range for delay time tsd M-100-200-300-400 ms M-80 ... 4000 msSwitchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection (I2t-dependent function)

✓ ✓

Setting range for delay time tsd at I2t 100-200-300-400 ms 100 ... 400 msZone Selective Interlocking function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-ModulInstantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓

Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Setting range Ii = In × ... 1.5-2.2-3-4-6-8-10-12-0.8 x Ics 1.5 × In ... 0.8 × IcsGround-fault protection ❑ Module can be retrofitted ❑ Module can be retrofittedTripping and alarm function ✓ ✓

Tripping function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓ Alarm function can be switched on/off -- ✓ Detection of the ground-fault current through summation cur-rent formation with int. or ext. neutral conductor transformer

✓ ✓

Detection of ground-fault current through external current transformer

✓ ✓

Setting range of the operating current Ig for release A-B-C-D-E A ... ESetting range of the operating current Ig for alarm A-B-C-D-E A ... ESetting range of the delay time tg 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 msSwitchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve (I2t-dependent function)

✓ ✓

Setting range for delay time tg at I2t 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 msZone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-ModulParameter set switchoverSwitchable between parameter set A and B -- ✓

LCDAlphanumeric LCD (4-line) ❑ --Graphical LCD (24 V, external power supply required) -- ✓

CommunicationCubicleBUS integrated ✓ ✓

Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP ✓ ✓

Measurement functionMeasurement-function capable with measurement function Plus

✓ ✓

LED displaySolid-state release active ✓ ✓

Alarm ✓ ✓

ETU fault ✓ ✓

L-release ✓ ✓

S-release ✓ ✓

I-release ✓ ✓

N-release ✓ ✓

G-release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)G-alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Release through extended protection functions ✓ ✓

Communication ✓ ✓

Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)Overload warning ✓ ✓Load shedding, load receiving ✓ ✓Leading signal overload trip 200 ms ✓ ✓Temperature alarm ✓ ✓Phase unbalance ✓ ✓Instantaneous short-circuit release ✓ ✓Short-time delayed short-circuit release ✓ ✓Overload trip ✓ ✓Neutral conductor release ✓ ✓Ground-fault protection release ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Ground-fault alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module) ✓ (only with ground-fault prot. module)Auxiliary relay ✓ ✓ETU fault ✓ ✓

Setting range of the operating current Ig Increment size for adjustment of M For continuation of legend see page 15/30.

Size I and size II Size III From ... to Increment size

From ... to Increment size

A 100 A 400 A 0 ... 1 0.1 1000 ... 1600 50B 300 A 600 A 1 ... 100 1 1600 ... 10000 100C 600 A 800 A 100 ... 500 5 10000 ... max 1000D 900 A 1000 A 500 ... 1000 10E 1200 A 1200 A

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/32 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Characteristic curves

Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following. The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant parts of the characteristics have to be combined.The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore not yet enabled, the opening time is extended, depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)

Refer to the following legend for tolerances.The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between –5 and +55 °C. The release can be operated at ambient temperatures of –20 to +70 °C. An ex-tended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU25B solid-state release, LSI characteristic curve

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release, G characteristic curve

Tolerances for the set currents L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 x IRS: –0 %, +20 %I: –0 %, +20 %G: –0 %, +20 %

Tolerances for the tripping times L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curveS: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms I: < 50 ms G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU15B solid-state release

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU27B solid-state release, LSIN characteristic curve

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B solid-state release, S characteristic curve1) Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A

Size III: 400 ... 1200 A. 2) With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response

times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 100

NS

E0_

0152

0

[s]

/ n

R min R max

0,4 ... 1,0 x n

sd min1,25 ... 12 x n

0 ... 0,4 s

sd max

sd max

sd min

i > 20 x nmax. 50 kA

i

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100 1000 10000 100000

NS

E0_

0152

1

[s]

g min g max

100 ... 1200 A1)

0,1 ... 0,5 s g max

g min

A

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 100

NS

E0_

0152

7

[s]

/ n

i min i max

R min R max

0,5 ... 1,0 x n

2 ... 8 x n

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 100

NS

E0_

0151

9

[s]

/ n

R min R max

0,4 ... 1,0 x nN

sd min1,25 ... 12 x n

0 ... 0,4 s

sd max

sd max

sd min

i > 20 x nmax. 50 kA

i

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 100

NS

E0_

0152

3

[s]

sd

0,1 ... 0,4 s

/ n

2sd = const

1,25 ... 12 x n

2sd = const

sd = const

0,02 ... 0,4 s

Op

enin

g ti

me

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/33Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following. The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant parts of the characteristics have to be combined.The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore not yet enabled, the opening ime is extended, depending on the level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.2)

Refer to the following table for tolerances.The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures at the circuit breaker between -5 and +55 °C. The release can be operated at ambient temperatures of -20 to +70 °C (ETU76B with graphics display up to +55 °C). An extended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, L characteristic curve

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, I characteristic curve

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release, G characteristic curve

SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU76B solid-state release, S characteristic curve

Further characteristic curves are shown in the manual and the planning and configuring tool SIMARIS deSign, or ask your Siemens contact person.

Tolerances for the set currents L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 × IRS: –0 %, +20 %I: –0 %, +20 %G: –0 %, +20 %

Tolerances for the tripping times L: –20 %, +0 % for I2t characteristic curveS: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms I: < 50 ms G: –0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms

1) Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.

2) With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 100

NS

E0_

0152

2a

[s]

R

/ n

0,4 ... 1,0 x n

R24

2 ... 30s for

4 = const

2 = const

1 ... 5s for

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 1

NS

E0_

0152

4a

[s]

/ n

i

1,5 x n ... 0,8 x cs

/ cs

Op

enin

g ti

me

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

100 1000 10000 100000

NS

E0_

0152

5a

g 0,1 ... 0,5 s

g

[s]

100 ... 1200 A1)

A

Op

enin

g ti

me

2 = const

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

10000

0,1 1 10 1

NS

E0_

0152

6a

[s]

/ n / cw

sd

0,02 ... 4 s

2sd

0,1 ... 0,4 s

1,25 x n ... 0,8 x cw

sd

Op

enin

g ti

me

= const = const

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/34 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Dimensional drawings

Voltage transformer for SENTRON 3WL

Current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor

External current transformers for N conductor with copper connection pieces

■ Dimensions for option with door interlocking

1) Mounting surface

2) Center SENTRON 3WL operator panel

3) 8 mounting holes for door sealing frame

4) 3 mounting holes for door interlocking

External current transformers for N conductor without copper connection pieces

Door cut-out for operator panel

Door cut-out for operator panel using the door sealing frame

Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0

Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0

Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0

NSE0_01103a

277

125

99For mounting on35 mm standardmounting rail

� �

� �

��

��

��

���

��������

� �

� �

� �

���

� � � � � �

��

��

� � � �

� �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

��

��

��

���

��������

� � � �

���

� � �

��

��

� �

� � �

� �

� � �

� � � �

���

� � � �

��

��

��

���

��������

� � � � � �

� � �

��

��

Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0

Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0

Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0

Door cut-out with edge protector

Inner dimensions with mounted edge protector

Option with/without door interlocking

��������

� �

��

��

����

� � � � � �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

���

��

� �

����������

� �

���

���

� � � �

� �

� � � �

����

� �

� �

��������

� � �

��

� � �

� � �

� ��

� � � �

���

���

���

���

� � �

� � � � � � � � �

� �� � �

� � �

� � �

� � � � �

� � � �

� �

� �

��

� � � � �

���

���

���

� � � � �

���

���

���

� � � � �

� � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� �

� �

� �

����

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/35Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

CubicleBUS module3WL9 111-0AT2.-0AA0

Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0

3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0

47,5

70

94

86

6

81,945,5

3819

153

30

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/36 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Door cut-out for operator panel using protective cover IP55

Safety clearances from grounded parts

Protective cover, IP55

Safety clearances from live parts

1) Value for plate; 0 mm for struts and grids.2) 40 mm (size II: 70 mm) for plates which cover the lateral openings in the

guide frame.

All safety clearances above the circuit breaker refer to the upper edge of the auxiliary connector - not to the upper edge of the arc chute! See dimensional drawings on pages 15/37 to 15/45, parts 4) and 5).

Rated operational voltage

V/AC

Above auxiliary connector mm

Lateral (each side) mm

Rear

mm

Size I, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 0

Size I, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 0

Size I, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0

Size II, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 01000 180 0 0

Size II, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 01000 100 0 0

Size II, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover 500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0

Size III, fixed-mounted version 500 751) 0 0690 751) 0 01000 180 0 0

Size III, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 501) 0 0690 501) 0 01000 100 0 0

Size III, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 0 02) 0690 0 02) 0

DC non-automatic air circuit breakers300 45 0 0600 200 0 01000 150 0 0

��� ���

�����

����

��

��� ���

���

������

��� �����

��

��

����������������� ! �

"��������#�$%&� �%�$�#�������$���' �%$&�

Rated operational voltage

V/AC

Above auxiliary connector mm

Lateral (each side) mm

Rear

mm

Size I, fixed-mounted version 500 150 20 20690 300 50 125

Size I, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 150 20 14690 300 50 14

Size I, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 14 100 14690 14 100 14

Size II, fixed-mounted version500 250 50 20690 600 100 1401000 430 100 125

Size II, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover 500 250 50 14690 600 100 301000 350 100 14

Size II, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover 500 14 50 14690 14 225 14

Size III, fixed-mounted version500 75 20 20690 500 100 1251000 430 100 125

Size III, withdrawable version, without arc chute cover500 50 20 14690 500 100 141000 350 100 14

Size III, withdrawable version, with arc chute cover500 14 50 14690 14 200 14

�����

���

�����

��

��

������

�����������������������������

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/37Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Size I, up to 1600 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole

——— 4-pole version

1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.

2) Arc quenching space.

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.

4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.

5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.

6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.

7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.

8) "Secure OFF" locking device.

9) Key operation.

11) Terminal face.

14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

Vertical connection

15270300 10

390

437,

5

123,

544

0,5275

4) 5)NSE0_00611a

� ��

� �

��

���������

�� �� �� ��

���� �� ��

��

��

��

��

��

����

��

��

NSE0_00614e

aa

150

275

516

541,

5

1) 2) 14) 9)

150210 106

230 127

6)45

8)33,5

60,5

327,

546

1,5

76

3)

5,5

� ��

� �

�� ������

�� �� ����

�� �� �� ��

��

��

���� �

��

��

���

��

��

��

���

����

�����

��

��

�� �� ��

����

��

���� �

��

��

���

��

�����

��

���

� � � � �

� � � � �

�����

����

� � � �

�� ����

� �� � �

60 90 90 90

b

3)

NSE00619

��

90 90 9060

NSE00620

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b c d e f g

Up to 1000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541

1250 ... 1600 15 15 15 6 461 39 551

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/38 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size I, up to 1600 A, 3- and 4-pole, withdrawable version

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.For flange connections see following page.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

Vertical connection

——— 4-pole version

2) For guide frame without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.

10) Fixing holes 10 mm.11) Terminal face.

55

270

3013210

300

320

5)4)

10)

123,

527

546

8,5

465,

5

NSE0_00621a

������

����

��

��

��

� � � � � �

� � � � � � � �

� �

� �

������ ��

���

��

��

� � �

� � � �

� �

� � �

��

��

45

88,5121,5140,5

220

3)

7)

2)

8)9)

10)

586)

76

327

9

367,5382,5

150

aa

275

46051

9

327,

5

NSE0_00624c

4031

2742

Ø14

����

������

��

���

��

� � � � � �

� � � � � � � �

� �

��

��

��

���

����� � �

��

��

� � �

���

� �

� � �

� � � �

�� �� �� ��

��������

����

� ����

��

��

��

���

�����

��

����

��

��

�������

� ����

���

� � � � � � � �

� �

����� ���

� �

� � �

���

260350

287

69

551590

3)

10) 10)90 90

NS

E0_

0063

0a

Rated circuit breaker current A

a b c

Up to 1000 10 10 101250 ... 1600 15 15 15

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/39Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Size I, up to 1600 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For more connection options see previous page.

Flange connection

121

��

NS

E00

631

� � � �� � � �

� � � � � � � �

� �

���

��

��

��

� ��������

��

� �

� � �

� � �

��

��

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/40 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36. For flange connections see following page.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

Vertical connection, up to 3200 A

——— 4-pole version

1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.

11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker. 13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.

10270 85

440570

5)4)

123,

527

544

0,5

437,

5

NSE0_00633a

� �

� �

��

� ���������

�� ��� ��� ���

��

�� �� �� ��

��

��

��

��

��

���

����

NSE0_00636e150

210230

45

5,5

127

15027

5

327,

546

1,5

76

541,

5

aa

1)

6)

3)

106

451,

551

6621

13)

14)

2)

12)

� ��

� �

�� ������

�� ��� ��� ���

���� �� �� ��

��

����

��

��

��

��

���

���

����

130 90

3030

130 13090 35

11)

7)

Ø9

7)

460128139

590

3)Ø13,5

NS

E0_

0063

9f

�����

�����

��

���

��

� �

�� ���

���

���

��

���90 130 130 130

b

3)

NSE00641

3)

13013090 130

NSE00642

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b c d e f g

Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541

2500 15 15 20 6 461 39 551

3200/4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/41Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole

1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-

conductive surfaces.11) Terminal face.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For more connection options see previous page.

Vertical connection 4000 A

200 130 200

1020

NS

E0_

0186

8

142162

3030

85 Nm

11)40

100

1)

2)

345,

579

,5 Ø13,5461,

554

1,5

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/42 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size II, up to 3200 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For vertical connection and flange connection see following page.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing

grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.

6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.

10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.11) Terminal face.12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.

55350270

40

480

10)10)

465,

5

123,

527

546

8,5

NSE0_00643b

4) 5)

����

�������

� � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

� � �

���

� �

����������

��

��

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

��

��

2202742

40 31 45 6)

88,5121,5140,5

58

8)9)

7632

7,5

518,

5

150

aa27

546

052062

0

327367,5382,5

13)

12)2)

7)

10)Ø14

9

3)

NSE0_00646f

����

�����

�� �����

� � � � �� � � � � �� �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

��

��

��

��

� �

��� ������

��

� � �

��

�����

� � �

� � �

��

��

��

����������

�����

��

��

��

��

������

��

���

90400

530

90 90 90

55 45 130 130 13010) 10)

6928

7

NS

E0_

0065

2b

3)

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b c

Up to 2000 10 10 10

2500 15 15 20

3200/4000 30 30 20

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/43Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

——— 4-pole version

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.

11) Terminal face.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For more connection options see previous page.

Vertical connection, up to 3200 A

Vertical connection 4000 A

Flange connection

����

���

���

���

��

�� �

���

��

��

���

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� � �

� � �

���

11)

200

100

NS

E0_

0186

9

40

3030

177197

13055

200

1020

45

315,

5

109,

5

4,6

121

NS

E00

653

� � � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� �

��

��

��

�����

�����

����� ���

� � � �

� � �

� � �

���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/44 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size III, up to 6300 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole

——— 4-pole version

1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or

non-conductive surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the

system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.

11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker.

13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

Vertical connection

12205270680

890

4) 5)

437,

5

123,

527

544

0,5

NSE0_00655a

��

��

���

��

����

�� �� �� ��

��

�� �� ��

��

��

��

��

��

���

��

��

�����

NSE0_00658e150

210230

4535

5,5

127

15027

5

327,

546

1,5

76

541,

5

3030

6)

3)

106

451,

551

6621

13) 1)

14)

2)12)

� �

� �

� �

��

��

��� ������

� � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

��

��

��

��� ������

��

��

� � � �

� �� � � �

160210

704914

130210

15210

248139

7) 7)

30

NS

E0_

0066

1e

Ø13,5

35

11)

M10

3)

������

��

���

���

��

��

� ��

��

� �

��

��

���� �

�����

85 210 210 210

10

3)

20NSE00663

��

��� ��� ��� ��� ���

�������

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/45Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For flange connections see following page.

Standard version Horizontal connection up to 5000 A

Optional connection variants Front connection (single hole), up to 4000 A

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673 up to 4000 A

Vertical connection, up to 6300 A

——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded

or non-conductive surfaces. 3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for

supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.

10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.11) Terminal face.12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V guide frame.13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.

5)4)

57590

800

16027010) 10) 10)

123,

527

546

8,5

465,

5

NSE0_00665b

��

����

�������

��

���

��

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� � �

� � �

��

�� ��������

� � �

� ����

� �

� � �

���

2202742

40 31 45 6)

88,5121,5140,5

58

8)9)

7632

7,5

518,

5

150

3030

275

46052

0620

327367,5382,5

13)

7)12)2)

10)Ø14

3)

9

NSE0_00668d

��

����

�����

��

���

��

� �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � �

� � �

� �

� �

���

� ���������

��

��

� � �

� �

���� � � �

� �

���

���

����

���

�����������

�� ����

��

��

��

��

��

���

������

��

��

� ��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

����

��

���

� �

� � �

� � �

� �

� � �

� �

� �

� � �

� � � � � � � � �

� � �

� �

��

��

160

2108557 210 210

630840

160 160 160

6928

7

NS

E0_

0067

4a

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b

4000 40 2105000 40 2106300 5 245

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/46 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For more connection options see previous page.

Flange connection, up to 4000 A

121

NS

E00

675

� � � � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� � �

� �

� � �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� � �

������

����

��

��

��

��

� ���������

� � �

� �

����

��

��

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/47Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

■ Schematics

Terminal assignment diagram

Internal wiring

1413121110

987654321

1413121110

987654321

1413121110

987654321

L1L2L3

24 V DC input

Remote reset bell alarm & tripped indicator F7

G transformer S2

N sensor S2N sensor S1

ext. voltage transformer Comext. voltage transformer L3ext. voltage transformer L2ext. voltage transformer L1

0 V DC24 V DC

G transformer S1

"Spring charged" signal S21

1st auxiliary release F1 "ST"

S1 "NO"

S1 "NC"

Closing solenoid

"Ready to close" signal S20

S2 "NO"

S2 "NC"

F4 only "quick OFF"F4 only "quick OFF"

2nd auxiliary release: F2 "ST", F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td"

S3 "NO" or S7 "NO"

S3 "NC" or S7 "NO"

S4 "NO" or S8 "NO"

S4 "NC" or S8 "NO"

EMERGENCY STOPor short terminals

Terminals External wiring

L–L+

1413121110

987654321

NS

E0_

0060

5 o

+BUSBUS

Short terminals if no N-sensor

M

Local electric close S10

opt. motor main switch S12Charging motor

(Option F02/F12)/COM16

12

34

56

78

9

DP

Writ

eE

nabl

eFree

Free

Clo

seO

pen

+–

+–

+–

INO

UT

Ext

erna

lIn

tern

al

Y1

F1, 2

N

e.g. current transformer in thestar point of power transformeror a summation currenttransformer 1200 A /1A

Trip signalling switch S24(position after tripping)

Signaling contact at the 1 st auxiliary release

S23Signaling contact at the 2nd auxiliary release

Termination resistor,if not external CB-module!

Not

ava

ilabl

e w

ith c

omm

unic

atio

n co

nnec

tion

"F02

" or “

F12”

.C

OM

15/C

OM

16 m

odul

e is

at p

ositi

on "-

X7"

.

optionalAccessories

(Auxiliary switch S1, S2 = Standard)

(sw) (br)

L1L2L3N

L+L– c

L+ c

L+L– c

c

L+L– c

L+L– c

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15/48 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Example of an overall circuit diagram for SENTRON 3WL

(3WL1. ..–.....–4GN4–Z C11+ C22 + K07)

Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy fea-ture with electrical ON button (option C11), with ready-to-close signaling switch (optionl C22), with LSING solid-state release,

with "UVR" undervoltage release (F3), with "ST" shunt release (F1), with tripped signal switch (option K07), with auxiliary switch 4 NO + 4 NC.

Function diagram of SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker

-A1 Solid-state release ETU-S1/-S2 1st auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)-S3/-S4 2nd auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)-S7 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S7 (2 NO) can be used

if there is no S3 - S3 and S7 have the same terminal assignment/mounting space

-S8 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S8 (2 NO) can be used if there is no S4 - S4 and S8 have the same terminal assignment/mounting space

3WL1. ..-.....-...2 (2 NO + 2 NC) S1+S23WL1. ..-.....-...4 (4 NO + 4 NC) S1+S2+S3+S43WL1. ..-.....-...7 (6 NO+ 2 NC) S1+S2+S7+S83WL1. ..-.....-...8 (5 NO + 3 NC) S1+S2+S3+S8

-S10 Electrical ON button-S11 Internal motor shutdown switch (if spring is tensioned) -S12 Motor shutdown switch

(no automatic tensioning of spring)-S20 Ready-to-close signaling switch-S24 Tripped signal switch

-F1 1st auxiliary release, shunt release-F3 2nd auxiliary release, undervoltage release-F5 Tripping solenoid

-M Motor for "charging energy store"-P Stored-energy mechanism-QS Actuator lever for "stored-energy mechanism"-Q1 Main contacts-T1/-T2/-T3 Current transformers-X5/-X6/-X7/-X8 Terminals-Y1 Closing solenoid-R Indicator and reset button for solid-state release

-X8.9/-X8.10 Connection option: external neutral conductor transformer

M

R

-S4-S3-S2-S1-Q1

L1(L+)

-X7.

9 -X

6.7

-X6.

14

-X5.

12

-X5.

2

-X6.

6

-X7.

12-X

7.14

QS P

N(L-)

-S11

-Y1

-F1

-F3

-T3

-T1

-T21 3 5 -X

6.12

-X6.

10

-X6.

4-X

6.2

-X5.

10-X

5.8

-X5.

6-X

5.4

2 4 6

-X6.

11-X

6.9

-X6.

3-X

6.1

-X5.

9-X

5.7

-X5.

5-X

5.3

-X8.

9-X

8.10

*

N(L-)

ETUL

S

I

G

NN

-A1

-F5

-S24

-S20

-X6.

5

-X7.

13

-X5.

11

-X6.

13

-X6.

8

-X5.

1

NS

E0_

0155

8b

L1(L+)

mech.

mech.

-S10

U<

-S12

version

OFF

ON

ON

* Short terminals, if no N sensor

ON

OFF

electr.

releasecontact

NSE0_01559c

M1

P

1

S20

F1

F2

F3

F4

Y1

Q1 S1 & S2S3 & S4

F5

T1

T2

T3

T4

2

3

S24

A1

LSI

GNN

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/49Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)

Project planning aids

15

Example of the mode of operation of Zone Selective Interlocking functionality in power distribution

SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers used in various staggered levels

Connection diagram for a Zone Selective Interlocking functionality with multiple infeed and several outgoing units with SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers

Zone Selective Interlocking functionality: Connection using a coupling switch, use of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers

■ More information

Up-to-date information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sentron

SENTRON 3WL

SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL

SENTRON 3WL

SENTRON 3WLSENTRON 3VLN

SE

0_01

897

3456

345

3456

6

3456

3456

3456

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL

SENTRON 3WL

NSE0_01898

3456

65 1 2 3 4 3456

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI module ZSI

mod

ule

SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL

SENTRON 3WL

NSE0_01899

3456

65 1 2 3 4 3456

SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL3456

3456

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI module ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

ZSI

mod

ule

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

General data

15/50 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ Technical specifications

1) Make-time through activation solenoid for synchronization purposes (short-time excited) 50 ms.

2) Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see Operating Manual).

3) Further technical specifications on request.

1) At Ue = 220 V DC.2) At Ue = 300 V DC.

3) At Ue = 600 V DC.4) At Ue = 1000 V DC.

Size II

Type 3WL12 10 3WL12 20 3WL12 40

Rated current In at 40 °CMain conductor A ... 1000 2000 4000

Rated operational voltage Ue(1000 V version, see Catalog LV 1, order code "A05")

V DC ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000

Rated insulation voltage Ui V DC 1000 1000 1000

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp• Main current paths• Auxiliary circuits• Control circuits

kVkVkV

1242.5

1242.5

1242.5

Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes

Permissible ambient temperature• Operation• Storage

°C°C

–25/+75–40/+70

–25/+75–40/+70

–25/+75–40/+70

Permissible load At rear horizontal main circuit connections(Cu painted black)

Up to 40 °CUp to 55 °CUp to 60 °CUp to 70 °C

AAAA

1000100010001000

2000200020001950

4000364035003250

Power loss at In for symmetrical loadsWithdrawable circuit breakers W 280 770 1640

Operating times• Make-time• Opening time

• Electrical make-time (through activation solenoid)1)

• Electrical opening time (through shunt release)

• Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)

msms

msms

ms

3534

10073

73

3534

10073

73

3534

10073

73

Endurance3)

• Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• Mechanical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles• Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles• 1000 V version Oper. cycles• Electrical (with maintenance)2) Oper. cycles

10 00015 000

60001000

15 000

10 00015 000

60001000

15 000

10 00015 000

40001000

15 000

Switching frequency • 600 V version • 1000 V version

1/h1/h

6020

6020

6020

Mounting position

Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover

Auxiliary conductors (Cu)Max. number of auxiliary conductors × cross-section(solid/stranded)

Standard connection = strain-relief clamp• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2• With twin end sleeve

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16); 1 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)1 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 1 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

Optional connection = tension spring• Without end sleeve• With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2

2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)2 × 0.5 mm2 (AWG 20) ... 2 × 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)

Weights 3-pole

4-pole

• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames

• Fixed-mounted circuit breakers• Withdrawable circuit breakers• Guide frames

kgkgkg

kgkgkg

566031

677237

566031

677237

646845

778254

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � �

������

����

and/ or

Size II

Type 3WL12

Switching capacity class DCShort-circuit breaking capacityUp to 220 V DCUp to 300 V DCUp to 600 V DCUp to 1000 V DC

Icc Icc Icc Icc

kAkAkAkA

35302520

Rated short-time withstand current Icw0.5 s1 s2 s3 s

kAkAkAkA

--351)/302)/253)/204)

----

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/51Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15

■ Characteristic curves

DIGmat S100 characteristic curve

■ Dimensional drawings

DIGmat S100

DIGmat S100 DIGmat S100 drilling pattern

���

��

��

���

����

�� �

�����

� �

!"#

$%���"�!&#�"�!'#

&

'

&

'

$ %��() � $ %�(� �

����*+���%�( $+

��%�( $+�*',��%�)+ �

��- �

%��()�(((�(�%��(((���"����.%��( ������(((�)

$

$

+

$$

��

�������

�/01

1�

�/01��� 2��3 4��5 ����

���/�

��

���

4�5�������

� 6

�������

��

���

��

���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15/52 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

Vertical connection

——— 4-pole version

1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.2) Arc quenching space, "� 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.

11) Terminal face.12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker. 14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections. 15) Arc quenching space, 300 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces. 16) Arc quenching space, 600 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive

surfaces.17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or

non-conductive surfaces.

10270 85

440570

5)4)

123,

527

544

0,5

437,

5

NSE0_00633a

��

� �

��

� ���������

�� ��� ��� ���

��

�� �� �� ��

��

��

��

��

��

���

����

NSE0_02003150

210230

45

5,5

127

15027

5

327,

546

1,5

76

541,

5

aa

1)

6)

3)

106

451,

551

6602

2)16) 17)

14)

12)15)

447

� ��

� �

�� ������

�� ��� ��� ���

���� �� �� ��

��

����

��

��

��

��

���

���

����

130 90

3030

130 13090 35

11)

7)

Ø9

7)

460128139

590

3)Ø13,5

NS

E0_

0063

9f

�����

�����

��

���

��

� �

�� ���

���

���

��

���90 130 130 130

b

3)

NSE00641

3)

13013090 130

NSE00642

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b c d e f g

Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541

4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/53Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For vertical connection and flange connection see following page.

Standard version Horizontal connection

Optional connection variants Front connection (single)

Front connection (double hole) according to DIN 43673

——— 4-pole version2) For guide frame � 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing

grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.

6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.

7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.

8) SENTRON 3WL in test position

9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.

10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.

11) Terminal face.

12) Guide frame upper edge – only 1000 V AC version.

15) Arc quenching space, 300 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

16) Arc quenching space, 600 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or non-conductive surfaces.

55350270

40

480

10)10)

465,

5

123,

527

546

8,5

NSE0_00643b

4) 5)

����

�������

� � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

� � �

���

� �

����������

��

��

� � �

� � �

� � �

� � �

��

��

2202742

40 31 45 6)

88,5121,5140,5

58

8)9)

7632

7,5

518,

5

150

aa27

546

052065

1

496

327367,5382,5

16) 17)2)

12)15)

7)

10)Ø14

9

3)

NSE0_02084

����

�����

�� �����

� � � � �� � � � � �� �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

��

��

��

��

� �

��� ������

��

� � �

��

�����

� � �

� � �

��

��

��

����������

�����

��

��

��

��

������

��

���

90400

530

90 90 90

55 45 130 130 13010) 10)

6928

7

NS

E0_

0065

2b

3)

Rated circuit breaker current

A

a b c

Up to 2000 10 10 10

4000 30 30 20

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15/54 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

Size II, up to 4000 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole

——— 4-pole version

3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.

11) Terminal face.

For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see page 15/36.

For more connection options see previous page.

Vertical connection

Flange connection

����

���

���

���

��

�� �

���

��

��

���

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� � �

� � �

���

121

NS

E00

653

� � � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� �

��

��

��

�����

�����

����� ���

� � � �

� � �

� � �

���

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers

15/55Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15

■ Schematics

Schematics of the DIGmat S100 and the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker

Application examples

The connection to the circuit breakers is not dependent on direc-tion and polarity; the circuit diagrams can be adapted accordingly.If the parallel or series connections are made directly to theconnecting bars, for thermal reasons the continuous load on the circuit breakers must only be 80 % of the permissible operational

current. If the parallel or series connection is made at a distance of 1 m from the connecting bars, the circuit breaker can be used at full operational current load.

] Grounded-neutral system

@ Load

7

��

'� �

��)

,( ,( , ( , (

���)

'� �

,)(��

,)(��

,)(��

,)(��

�+��������

,(

,(

�8�

97

,)(�

,)(�

,)(�

,)(�

,)(�

,)(�)

,)(�)

,)(�

��

��

)

)

�,.() �, (����$��

�: �:

�,.( �, (

�8� ) .

�����

� �

��

;��������<�����='�>�����<�?�@��

;'���������$����=

�A���B.��CD

�>���������-�'

����

'����

�����-�$�"��

�����������?��

����������?��

Rated operational voltage

Required series breaks at rated voltage

For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers (operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)

For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers(operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)

Up to 300 V + 10 %

1-pole, 2 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system

2-pole 1-pole, 3 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system

2-pole 2 parallel conducting paths

Over 300 V + 10 % Up to 600 V + 10 %

2-pole, only with grounded-neutral system

1-pole, 2 parallel conducting paths, only with grounded-neutral system

2-pole

Over 600 V + 10 % Up to 1000 V + 10 % (version for 1000 V required, order with "-Z" and order code A05)

1-pole, only with grounded-neutral system

2-pole, only with grounded-neutral system

1-pole, only with grounded-neutral system

© Siemens AG 2009

3WL Air Circuit Breakers3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)

Project planning aids

15/56 Siemens LV 1 T · 2009

15

■ More information

Up-to-date information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sentron

© Siemens AG 2009